JP2020068899A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine in which game amusement is enhanced.SOLUTION: In a variation pattern PC1-1, the execution ratio of a winning first battle performance 2: 4: 9 ("small winning" is most likely to execute the first battle performance) in cases where the variable display result is "big winning" of "5R probability variation A", the variable display result is "big winning" of "5R probability variation B", and the variable display result is "small winning". On the other hand, in a variation pattern PC1-2, the execution ratio of a winning second battle performance is 10: 9.5: 1 ("5R probability variation A" is most likely to execute the second battle performance) in cases where the variable display result is "big winning" of "5R probability variation A", the variable display result is "big winning" of "5R probability variation B", and the variable display result is "small winning".SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-14

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In Patent Document 1, The first state (closed state) where the game medium is easy to win, A variable winning means (large winning opening) capable of changing the game medium to a second state (open state) in which winning is difficult or difficult. Advantageous state control means for controlling the variable winning means to an advantageous state (big hit game) capable of changing to the first state for a predetermined period, Special state control means for controlling the variable winning means to a special state (small hit game) that can be changed to the first state for a period shorter than the predetermined period, Special state control means for controlling to a special state (probability change state) whose frequency of control to the special state is higher than the normal state, When controlled to the special state, Suggestion production execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion production (stop display of a decorative pattern) that suggests that the variable winning means is changed to the first state, A gaming machine provided with is disclosed.

JP, 2010-200902, A

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the effect is monotonous and the interest in the game cannot be improved.

  It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with an increased interest in gaming.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a characteristic portion 71AK) for playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball),
A first state in which the game medium is easy to win (for example, a large winning opening or a special winning opening is open) and a second state in which the game medium is unwinnable or difficult to win (for example, a large winning opening or a special winning opening is closed) ) Variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7 and special variable winning ball device 17),
Advantageous state control means (for example, main board 11) that the variable winning means controls to the advantageous state (for example, big hit game state) that can be changed to the first state (for example, long open or middle open) for a predetermined period,
A special state (for example, a small hit game state) in which the variable winning means can change to the first state (for example, a short open state) for a period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, a period when the upper limit open period is shorter than the big hit game state). ) Special state control means (for example, the main board 11),
Special state control means (for example, main board 11) for controlling to a special state (for example, high probability / low base state (for example, second KT state, small hit RUSH)) whose frequency of control to the special state is higher than the normal state )When,
A plurality of types of suggestive effects that suggest that the variable winning means changes to the first state when controlled to the special state (for example, display of icon A, display of icon B, display of icon C) And a suggested effect execution means (for example, effect control board 12) capable of executing
A plurality of types including a first specific effect (for example, a first battle effect) and a second specific effect (for example, a second battle effect) different from the first specific effect when being controlled to the special state Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control board 12) capable of executing the specific effect (for example, battle effect),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect when the specific effect is executed,
The ratio of which of the plurality of types of suggestive effects is executed is different between when the first specific effect is executed and when the second specific effect is executed (for example, FIG. 9-14, (Determination rate in Figure 9-15),
It is characterized by

  According to the above configuration, since the ratio of which of the plurality of types of suggestive effects is executed is different between when the first specific effect is executed and when the second specific effect is executed, the effect is monotonous. Therefore, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The production period of the second specific production is longer than that of the first specific production (for example, the production execution period of the second battle production is longer),
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, there are many variations of the production, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The plurality of types of suggestive effects include a first suggestive effect (for example, the display of the icon C) and the variable winning means in the first state in a mode having a higher advantage than when the first suggestive effect is executed. A second suggestion effect that changes to (for example, display of icon A),
The second suggestive effect is executed at a higher rate when the second specific effect is executed than when the first specific effect is executed (for example, the second battle effect is executed). At this time, the icon A is more easily displayed than when the first battle effect is executed),
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, when expecting the execution of the second suggestive effect, the player pays attention to whether the first specific effect is executed or the second specific effect is executed to improve the interest of the game. You can

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
Variable display (for example, variable display of the second special figure game or decorative design) can be executed,
Pending storage means (for example, a second pending storage buffer, a second pending storage buffer, a second preliminary storage buffer, for storing information about variable display that has not been started yet as pending information (for example, a random number value for determining a display result or a variation pattern, a prefetch determination result command) Command buffer at the time of winning a prize)
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect (for example, display of the icon C) based on the hold information.
The suggestive effect is an effect capable of displaying one or more suggestive displays (for example, displaying one or more icons C),
You may do it.

    According to the above configuration, since a plurality of suggestion displays can be displayed, the interest of the game can be improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above,
The suggestion display is displayed based on the specific effect (for example, the icon is additionally displayed by the win of the teammate character 71AK001 in the battle effect).
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, since the suggestion display is displayed based on the specific effect, it is possible for the player to pay attention to the presence or absence of the execution of the specific effect and improve the interest of the game.

(6) In the gaming machine of (4) or (5) above,
The specific effect execution unit can execute the specific effect when the suggestion display is displayed (for example, see FIG. 9-3),
The rate at which the specific effect is executed varies depending on the number of the suggested displays being displayed (see, for example, FIG. 9-16),
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, the ratio of the specific effect to be executed varies depending on the number of displayed suggestion displays, so that the effect is not monotonous and the interest of the game can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (4) to (6) above,
The specific effect execution unit can execute the specific effect when the suggestion display is displayed (for example, see FIG. 9-3),
The smaller the number of displayed suggestion displays, the higher the ratio of execution of the second specific effect (see, for example, FIG. 9-16),
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, the smaller the number of displayed suggestion displays is, the higher the rate of execution of the second specific effect is, so that the effect is not monotonous and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (4) to (7) above,
Specific display means (for example, effect) that can display a specific display (for example, meter image 71AK021) and update display of the specific display (for example, increase of meter image 71AK021) according to the number of times of execution of the suggestive effect. Control board 12),
The privilege display means (for example, the production control board 12) which gives a predetermined privilege (for example, opening of a premier song) when the specific display is in a specific mode (for example, the meter image 71AK021 is full) by the update display. And
The specific display means,
When the suggestion effect is executed a predetermined number of times, it is possible to perform update display of the specific display (for example, the meter of the meter image 71AK021 rises every time 10 icons A are displayed),
When the suggestion effect in which the variable winning means changes to the first state in a mode in which the degree of advantage is lower than a predetermined reference is executed, it is possible to update the specific display with a specific number smaller than a predetermined number. (For example, the meter rises every time five icons B are displayed, and the meter of the meter image 71AK021 rises every time two icons C are displayed).
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, there are many variations regarding the update display, and the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of a first special symbol process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit judgment table, a small hit judgment table, and a big hit type judgment table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning a prize ball device and a special variable winning a prize ball device in a KT state. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st gate passage waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd gate passage waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining how to transition the gaming state. It is an explanatory view for explaining an external output signal. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the output timing of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2. It is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows pre-processing for opening an ordinary electric accessory. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows demonstration display control processing. It is a flow chart which shows demonstration display control processing. It is a flow chart which shows variable display start waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is the explanation drawing which shows the concrete example of the production decision table. It is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process. It is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process. It is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the small hit notification display color determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production end determination table. It is a flowchart showing a small hit end effect processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining the production mode of re-lottery production. It is an explanatory view for explaining the production mode of re-lottery production. It is an explanatory view for explaining the production mode of re-lottery production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the presentation mode of the notification at the time of passing a gate. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. It is an explanatory view for explaining a case where it is constituted so that a set value can be changed. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the display result of a 1st special figure game and a 2nd special figure game. It is a figure which shows the example of a big hit type. It is a diagram of an example of an effect screen in a high probability / low base state. It is a diagram of an example of an effect screen when the first battle effect is executed in a high probability / low base state. It is a diagram of an example of an effect screen when the second battle effect is executed in a high probability / low base state. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern of the second special figure game in the high probability / low base state. It is a timing chart which shows the opening period of a special winning opening and a special winning opening, a game state, etc. when a 2nd special figure game is performed several times. It is a timing chart which shows the opening period of a special winning opening and a special winning opening, a game state, etc. when a 2nd special figure game is performed several times. It is the figure which shows the example of production control command. It is a flow chart of processing performed during command analysis processing. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second start winning command buffer. It is a flowchart of a part of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart of a part of variable display start setting processing. It is a figure which shows the 1st example of determination regarding a battle production. It is a figure which shows the 2nd example of determination regarding a battle production. It is a figure which shows the example of a decision regarding the battle production which concerns on a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | generation screen which concerns on a modification, and the relationship of the rise of a meter, and the number of icons.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

  The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

  Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, there is provided a display area for displaying a suspension display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure, and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. Area 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

  In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B that are configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A is the number of LEDs that are turned on. The first pending storage number is displayed by, and the second pending display unit 25B displays the second pending storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning port is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, a predetermined number (1) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

  A row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening so that the game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area do not enter the area where the first starting winning opening is provided. Has been done. Thus, the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering is provided, so that the game ball is operated to aim at the left side of the game area (so-called left hitting). The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation is performed.

  In this example, the row of nails 19 is provided, so that the game ball can be won in the first start winning port only when the player makes a left-handed operation. I can't stop. For example, the game ball may be configured to be able to win in the first starting prize hole only when the player is left-handed because the first starting prize hole is provided on the left side of the game area. The mouth may be provided on the left side of the game area, and the row of nails 19 may also be provided so that the game ball can be won in the first start winning opening only when the left striking operation is performed.

  A pass gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

  Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 forming a special winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-back direction to move the bottom surface. The game ball is changed to an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which a game ball can be won in a special winning opening located below the member and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which the game ball cannot be won. The special variable winning ball device 7 is a jackpot gaming state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the bottom member is moved forward. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the forward movement is performed toward the rear, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening, which is the winning area.

  Below the special variable winning ball device 7, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning port for a small hit, and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning port, as shown in FIG. As shown in, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side on the right side. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-back direction. By moving the ball back and forth, a special winning opening and a second starting winning opening located below the bottom member allow the game ball to win the prize (also called the open condition) and the game ball cannot win the prize. Say). The special variable winning ball device 17 is a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit pattern) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is moved forward toward the front, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening which is the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B, when the normal symbol display device 20 hits and displays the symbol, the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state where the bottom member is moved forward toward the front, The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

  In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, so that the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device 7 moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

  Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed such that the bottom surface members are slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, so the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are variable. If the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, the game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 does not win the special winning ball device 6B. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning port is in the open state, the gaming ball dropped to the second starting winning port is a special variable winning ball. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second start winning hole is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided to the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is open, the gaming ball wins the special winning opening. Furthermore, if the special winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and drops to the out opening as it is.

  Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of restriction pieces for reducing the flow-down speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In the present example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with restriction pieces, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is delayed compared with the case without the restriction piece.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the special variable winning ball device. Since the game balls are configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. Can be said.

  Inside the special winning opening, there is provided a switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning a prize ball device 7 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes a state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning a prize ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, it is impossible to pass the game ball to the special winning opening (enter) to obtain the prize ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

  Inside the special winning opening, a switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting the game ball winning in the special winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening that is opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of the winning balls is smaller than that when the gaming ball wins the big winning opening, For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter) other prize holes such as the first start prize hole 1 and the second start prize hole. Therefore, if the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes a state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot get the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. You will be at a disadvantage.

  Further, in the second starting winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting the game ball winning in the second starting winning opening is provided. When the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the passage gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning port). Is provided on the right side of the game area, so when the player is in a big hit game or in the KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the game area (a so-called right hitting operation). )I do.

  At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, winning at the starting openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

  Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure pending memories, which is the number of universal figure pending games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, since the variation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the passage gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, since the big hit game state is entered based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the pass gate 41, the pass gate 41 also plays a role as an operation area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves as both a normal starting region and an operating region.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effect is provided in the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball striking device. ) Is provided with a hit ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the action (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to aim the left side of the gaming area and perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation). When the player makes a left-hand hitting operation by rotating the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player, and the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol display The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

  In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period during execution of the special drawing game, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state described later (starting winning occurs, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) As a fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "big hit". .. Also, if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "missing" is indicated. Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and the small hit symbol may be "small hit".

  After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, provided that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

  In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. In this way, one cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

  In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  In addition, the "big hit" is set to the big hit type. For example, multiple types of opening mode (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the special winning opening and a plurality of types of game states after the big hit game state (normal state, probability variation state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) are prepared. The jackpot type is set according to these. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain a large number of prize balls, or a big hit type that has few prize balls or almost no prize balls may be provided.

  After the big hit game state is finished, it may be controlled to a certain variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the big hit type.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), the probability variation control is performed so that the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than that in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

  In the KT state, the KT control that is more likely to make a small hit than in the normal state is executed. With this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hitting game state, compared to the large hitting game state, a small number of prize balls can be obtained, but this is an advantageous state for the player.

  In the high base state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special map change time (period during which the special map changes) compared to the normal state is executed (time saving state), and it is called "Public hit" in the normal figure game. By increasing the probability of becoming higher than in the normal state, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening (high opening control, high base control) is also executed. The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

  The probability change state, the KT state, and the high base state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started is satisfied. To do. The condition that the end condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cut (variation of the number of times probability).

  The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player, a game state other than a special state such as a probability change state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability of becoming the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset, when the predetermined return processing is not executed after power-on) is controlled. It is in a state of being.

  When the big hit game is finished and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to carry out a firing operation (right hitting operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player makes a right-hand hitting operation by rotating the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player and the gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, the opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In the second special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) As a fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "big hit", If a predetermined special symbol different from the big hit symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing symbol".

  After the display result in the second special figure game is "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, provided that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

  After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

  The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on / off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

  As effects to be executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination described later, the decorative design which is not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect that continues.

  In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the proportion of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) that is a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

  In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "uncertain variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation design, and the even decoration pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation design (normal design). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special drawing game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state of a mode similar to small hit game state) and when it is "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design does not become the reach mode, but as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach-miss".) May be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach-miss"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss") (Also referred to as) fixed decoration pattern may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes “reach lost”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design, and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

  Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit performance, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect showing that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state the high-precision state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

  Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a production control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling a gaming state, a small hitting gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the universal figure hold display device 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

  The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch (first counting switch 23 and second counting switch 24). )) Is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 by taking in a detection signal (a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on due to a game ball passing or entering). The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 for the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the special winning opening door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later). )), The status of the game (for example, the start and end of variable display, the status of opening of the special winning opening, the occurrence of winnings, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121, thereby performing a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the effect execution based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and is a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal according to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting / extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

  It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 updatable counts the numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

  When the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using the error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. For these commands, the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the recovery from the power interruption has been performed or is being restored from the power interruption. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can regularly execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to execute the predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port are performed via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). The CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the first special symbol game, controlling the big hit game state and the small hit game state, and controlling the game state. (See below for details). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). The CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the second special symbol game, controlling the big hit game state and the small hit game state, and controlling the game state. It In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

  Following the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the management of execution and suspension of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The execution of the general figure game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the general figure reservation display unit 25C is turned on to display the number of general figure reservations.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process processing. In the first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

  In the first start winning a prize determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning to the first starting prize hole, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When the start winning award to the first start winning a prize mouth occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as the hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. To be done. In addition, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, a transmission for transmitting an effect control command for designating a determination result such as occurrence of a start winning, a first hold storage number, and a look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted in this way is effect control from the main board 11 by, for example, executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process processing is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

  After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S121A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the first special symbol process process (steps S110A to S121A), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  The first special symbol normal process of step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In the first special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game, based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Further, in the first special symbol normal process, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" In this case, the jackpot type is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the first special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

  When making various determinations based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The first variation pattern setting process of step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "1". In this first variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined using a random number value for determining the variation pattern, based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. It includes a process of determining which one. In the first fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether reach or not), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

  The first special symbol variation process of step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2". In this first special symbol variation processing, the setting process for changing the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol is measured. It includes processing to do. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation process ends. To do.

  The first special symbol stop process of step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3". In this first special symbol stop processing, to stop the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, to stop display (derive) the fixed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol It includes the process of setting. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "9". When the display result is "miss", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", the game state is also updated when the probability variation state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled, and when the end of the number of cuts is satisfied. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

  The first gate passage waiting process of step S114A is executed when the value of the fourth special process flag is "4". In this first gate passage waiting process, control for waiting passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is performed. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "5".

  The first jackpot opening preprocessing of step S115A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "5". In the first big hit opening pre-processing, based on the fact that the display result is "big hit", etc., the processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to the open state, etc. It is included. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of times of execution of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "6", and the first jackpot opening preprocessing is completed.

  The process during the first big hit opening of step S116A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "6". This first big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time after the special winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. , And a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "7". Then, the process during the opening of the first big hit is ended.

  The first jackpot opening post-processing of step S117A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "7". In the first big hit opening post-processing, processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the special winning opening is opened has reached the set upper limit number of executions, and when the upper limit execution number is reached, the big hit It includes processing for making settings for ending the gaming state. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “6”, while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the first special feature process flag is updated. The value of the figure process flag is updated to "8". When the value of the first special figure process flag is updated, the first jackpot release post-processing is ended.

  The first jackpot ending process of step S118A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "8". This first big hit end process corresponds to the process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, or the end of the big hit game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting the probability variation control, KT control, high base control, and the like. When such a setting is made, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first big hit ending process ends.

  The first small hit opening pre-processing of step S119A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "9". The first small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the special winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". . At this time, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the first small hitting opening pretreatment is ended.

  The process during the first small hit opening process of step S120A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "10". In the first small hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the special winning opening, and the timing of returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the like. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hitting game state comes, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "11", and the first small hitting opening process ends.

  The first small hitting end process of step S121A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "11". The first small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first small hitting end processing is ended.

  The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described in FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be described. In addition, each random number value extracted in the first starting winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter / timer circuit) are performed. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I / O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

  After the command analysis process is executed in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

  Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the production control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, the processing for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command or the like specifying start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative display variable display (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process ends. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative design in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative design.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control section 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L, 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect effect processing ends.

  The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

  The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . Further, in the small hitting production effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to end the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hitting finish effect. The value is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is finished.

  The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

  The big hit midfield effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of effect control of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description was a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the game medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus).

  The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game can be executed not only by mounting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed by using the hardware resources of the other device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 138IW)
Next, the characteristic part 138IW will be described. First, the game state in the characteristic unit 138IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the characteristic unit 138IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) that is more likely to be a small hit than the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state, and in this characteristic part 138IW, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). In the case of being controlled, in the case of being controlled to the low probability and the first KT state (low probability / first KT state), and in the case of being controlled to the high probability and the first KT state (high probability / first KT state). In some cases, the probability is high and the second KT state (high probability / second KT state) is controlled.

  In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in an open state, the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long and the small hit. Even if occurs, there are very few cases where the game balls are won in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 changes). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and is controlled to a high base state so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a long time. As will be described later, the second KT state in the KT state has a short opening time of the upstream side variable winning ball device 6B, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is transferred to the downstream special variable winning ball device 17. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur and is also controlled to a low base state to shorten the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B.

  Further, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in the characteristic portion 138IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state at the time of a normal drawing is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, while there is no case where it is determined as a small hit when the first special symbol changes, it is configured so that it may be determined as a small hit when the second special symbol changes (however, compulsory described later). Therefore, the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated mainly by changing the second special symbol, which is a game state advantageous to the player.

  It should be noted that the configuration for setting the KT state in the gaming state in which a small hit is more likely than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state is the same as that in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be selected in the KT state to be shorter than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to the constant time in the KT state is higher than in the normal state, and the KT state is changed to the normal state. It may be a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

  In addition, the characteristic portion 138IW is configured such that the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41 is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation positions of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the group of nails forming the flow path of the game ball. As will be described later in detail, in the characteristic portion 138IW, the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to be in the open state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. In the first KT state, which will be described later, the game ball passes. The time from the passage of the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41. Since it is shorter than the required time of 0.6 seconds, when one gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state. The game balls can be won as they are in the variable winning ball device 6B.

  FIG. 8-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the big hit determination table 138IW130a. The big hit determination table 138IW130a is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which big hit determination values to be compared with random numbers for big hit determination are set. The jackpot determination table 138IW130a includes an uncertain variation jackpot determination table used in an uncertain variation state (low probability state (low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT state)) and a certain variation state (high probability state (high probability state (high probability state)). / First KT state, high probability / second KT state)). The numerical values described in the left column of FIG. 8-1 (A) are set in the non-probability-variable jackpot determination table, and the numerical values described in the right column of FIG. 8-1 (A) are set in the probability-variable jackpot determination table. Each numerical value is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8-1 (A) is a jackpot determination value.

  FIGS. 8-1 (B) and (C) are explanatory views showing the small hit determination tables 138IW 130b and 130c. Among these, FIG. 8-1 (B) shows the small hit determination table 138IW130b for the first special symbol used when performing the variable display of the first special symbol. Moreover, FIG. 8-1 (C) shows the small hit determination table 138IW130c for the second special symbol used when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The small hitting determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a small hitting determination value to be compared with the random number for the large hitting determination is set. The small hit determination tables 138IW130b and 130c respectively include a non-certain change small hitting determination table used in a non-probable variation state (low probability state (low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT state)) and a probability variation state ( There is a probability variation small hitting determination table used in a high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state). The numerical values described in the left column of FIGS. 8-1 (B) and (C) are set in the non-probability variation small hitting determination table, and the probability variation small hitting determination table shown in FIG. ) And (C), the respective numerical values described in the right column are set. In addition, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8-1 (B) and (C) are the small hit determination values.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the small hit determination table 138IW130b for the first special symbol is not assigned a small hit determination value, and when it is not determined to be a big hit, There is no chance of a small hit. That is, if the big hit is not determined, all are out of place and the small hit probability is 0%. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (C), in the small hit determination table 138IW130c for the second special symbol, in the uncertain variation small hit determination table, the large hit determination value in the uncertain variation state (low probability state) ( All determination values (225 to 65535) except 0 to 224 are assigned as small hit determination values, and in the probability variation small hit determination table, the large hit determination value (0 to 2249) in the probability variation state (high probability state). All the judgment values (2250 to 65535) except for are assigned as the small hit judgment values, and when the big hit is not determined, the small hit is always made, and the small hit probability is 100%.

  The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number at a predetermined time. Any of the big hit determination random number values shown in FIG. If it matches the jackpot determination value of, it is determined to be a jackpot for special symbols. In addition, "probability" shown in FIG. 8-1 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of being a big hit, and in the probability variation state (high probability state), compared with the non-determination variation state (low probability state), The chance of being a big hit is 10 times. In addition, “probability” shown in FIGS. 8-1 (B) and (C) indicates a probability (ratio) of a small hit. Also, determining whether to make a big hit, it is to make a decision to move to the big hit gaming state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to transition to the small hit game state, whether the stop symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is a small hit symbol It also means to decide whether or not.

  FIGS. 8-1 (D) and 8 (E) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 138IW 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 138IW131a, 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, based on the random number for jackpot type determination, the type of jackpot is "2R normal jackpot", "2R probability change jackpot. , 6R regular big hit, "6R certainty big hit", "9R certainty big hit", or "16R certainty big hit".

  As shown in FIG. 8-1 (D), in the feature portion 138IW, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is determined as “16R probability variation big hit” with a probability of 9%, and a probability of 56%. Is determined as "6R probability variation big hit", and is determined as "6R normal big hit" with 35% probability. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (E), in the feature portion 138IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is determined as “16R probability variation big hit” with a probability of 10%, and 50%. The probability of "9R probability variation jackpot" is determined, the probability of 5% is determined as "2R probability variation jackpot", and the probability of 35% is determined as "2R normal variation jackpot".

  The "16R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state for 16 rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state is finished. Further, the "9R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 9 rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, the "6R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 6 rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, the "2R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of two rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state.

  The "6R normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 6 rounds and is shifted to a low probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, the "2R normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state for two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the big hit game state is finished.

  In this characteristic part 138IW, when it becomes "16R certainty variation big hit", "9R certainty variation big hit", "6R certainty variation big hit", and "6R regular big hit", a predetermined period (in this example, in each round of the big hit game) The special winning opening is controlled to be open until 30 seconds have elapsed or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won, and it is possible to win a maximum of 10 special winning openings in each round. Is. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probability variable big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be in an open state only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of prizes that can be won in each round is about two to three.

  Further, in this characteristic portion 138IW, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to any of the first KT state, the second KT state or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type, How to transition the game state after the big hit game will be described later (see FIG. 8-20).

  8-2 to 8-4 are explanatory views showing the variation patterns (variation time) of the special symbols and the decorative symbols used in the characteristic part 138IW. EXT shown in FIGS. 8-2 to 8-4 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 8-2 to 8-4, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the decorative symbol. 32 types of # 01 to # 32 are used. Hereinafter, for example, the variation pattern #n (n = 01 to 07 or 01 to 32) means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

  When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 8-2 (A) The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 8-2 (A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05 is determined.

  When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, in the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), in FIG. 8-2 (B) The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT shown is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

  When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 8C. The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be off, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. In addition, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined even when it is determined to be a small hit, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. In addition, when it is determined to be a big hit, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

  In this characteristic portion 138IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed even in the non-KT state and a small hit occurs, a situation in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the winning of the game balls into the special winning opening occurs. Will end up. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 138IW, as shown in FIG. 8C, even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variable time is extremely lengthened and the frequency of execution of the variable display is increased. The number of small hits is reduced to reduce the frequency of occurrence of small hits, and it is possible to prevent a situation where the small hits are aimed at to obtain a prize ball even in the non-KT state. In the characteristic portion 138IW, the "frequent hit occurrence frequency" is, for example, the occurrence rate of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. Is higher than in the normal state.

  In addition, in this characteristic part 138IW, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, the variation time is obtained even when it is a big hit. By relatively lengthening to 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of unreasonably aiming for a prize ball due to winning in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the first reserved memory in comparison with the case of a small hit. There is.

  When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of low probability / first KT state, the big hit game based on 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state is ended. A fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the low probability / first KT shown in FIG. 8-3D and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation are selected and varied. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 8-3 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Is decided.

  As shown in FIG. 8-3 (D), when it is determined that the first change of the low probability / first KT state is the deviation, the change time is shortened to 5 seconds and the second change pattern # 04 of the shortened change is set. It is determined. Further, when it is determined that a small hit is the first change of the low probability / first KT state, the second change pattern # 05 (the second start winning opening is opened) is a relatively long change time of 7 seconds for the small hit. (Variation pattern for preparation). As described above, in the characteristic part 138IW, when the first KT state is controlled, the frequency of small hits increases, but the variable winning ball device 6B is actually opened by increasing the opening time of the special winning ball. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in a state immediately after shifting to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately generated. If the device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, a considerable number of game balls may win the special winning opening. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 138IW, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 of the variable winning ball device 6B before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning prize ball device 17 to the open state after allowing a sufficient time for all the game balls accumulated on the bottom surface member to drop, thereby enabling winning into the special winning opening, This prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. In addition, when it is determined as a big hit as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

  In addition, in the case of executing the variable display of 2 to 49 fluctuations after finishing the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state, FIG. The low probability / first KT time shown in E) and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the 2nd to 49th fluctuations are selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 8-3 (E), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2-49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation patterns # 07 to # 13 It is decided to either. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (E), when it is determined that the low probability / the second KT state of the first KT state is the second to 49th variation, the second variation pattern # of the shortened variation having a short variation time of 5 seconds # 07 or the second fluctuation pattern # 08 of the shortened fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 1 second, which is even shorter, may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the low probability / the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the first KT state are deviations, the second fluctuation pattern # 09 with reach may be determined. Further, when it is determined that the small hit is the second to 49th fluctuations of the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern # 10 of the shortened fluctuation or the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. The second fluctuation pattern # 11 of the shortened fluctuation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined as the small hit as the 2-49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns # 07 and # 10 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns # 08 and # 11 include one or more second reserved memories. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the pending storage is quickly consumed and the operating rate is increased. Further, when it is determined that the big hit is the second to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

  In addition, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state, the 50th fluctuation display (that is, low probability / final change in the first KT state) is executed. If so, the low probability / first KT time and the 50th variation second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 8C is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 8-3 (F), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, one of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16. Is decided.

  In the characteristic portion 138IW, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as “during chance time” is displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 8-3 (F), when it is determined that the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state is a deviation or a small hit, a character display such as "end of chance time !!" is displayed on the image display device 5. The second variation pattern # 14 or the second variation pattern # 15 accompanied by the end display is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (F), when it is determined that the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state is a big hit, a character display such as “end of chance time !!” is displayed on the image display device 5. The second variation pattern # 16 with a predetermined restoration display after the completion display to be performed is determined.

  In addition, in this characteristic part 138IW, as shown in FIG. 8-2, when it is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first variation pattern # 07 having a variation time of 10 seconds is set. Is configured to determine. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit change of the first special symbol is set to a long change time, Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the big hit variation of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced outfall, the forced outfall frequently occurs even though the second KT state and the player is a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 138IW, by making the variation time of the big hit variation of the first special symbol a short variation time, the big hit game state based on the variation of the first special symbol is generated before the frequent forced deviation occurs. It is configured.

  Note that, unlike the feature part 138IW, even when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is not forced to fall off (for example, the first When the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol big hit symbol is stopped, the variation time of the first special symbol big hit in the KT state if the gaming machine is configured to force the second special symbol to fall off). May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit is the same short change time as the deviation, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from the small hit. Therefore, if the variation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long variation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that at least a plurality of small hits can occur. (For example, 1 minute) is ensured.

  When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R certainty variation jackpot or the 9R certainty variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is finished. A fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the high probability / first KT shown in FIG. 8-4 (G) and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation are selected and varied. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, one of the second variation patterns # 17 to # 21. Will be decided.

  As in the case of the first change of the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (G), the change time is also determined when the deviation is determined as the first change of the high probability / first KT state. In some cases, the second fluctuation pattern # 17 having a shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds may be determined. On the other hand, when the first variation of the high probability / first KT state is determined to be a deviation, the second variation pattern # 18 with reach may be determined. Also, when the small hit is determined as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern (second variation pattern # 19) for the second start winning opening opening preparation may be determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (G), when it is determined that the big variation is the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

  In addition, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R certainty variation jackpot or the 9R certainty variation jackpot that has triggered the high probability / first KT state, if the variation display after the second variation is executed, FIG. ) High probability / at the time of the first KT and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the second fluctuation and thereafter is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second variation after the high probability / first KT state, any of the second variation patterns # 22 to # 28. Will be decided.

  Note that, as in the case of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (H), when it is determined that there is a deviation after the second fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state, In some cases, the second variation pattern # 22 with a shortened variation with a variation time as short as 5 seconds or the second variation pattern # 23 with a shortened variation with a variation time as short as 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a deviation after the second variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 24 with reach may be determined. In addition, when it is determined that the small hit is the second variation of the high probability / first KT state and thereafter, the variation time is shortened to 5 seconds and the second variation pattern # 25 of the variation or the variation time is shortened to 1 second. The second fluctuation pattern # 26 of fluctuation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit has occurred after the second variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 27 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns # 22 and # 25 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns # 23 and # 26 are stored when one or more second reserved memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the pending storage is quickly consumed and the operating rate is increased. In addition, when it is determined that the big hit is the second variation after the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

  When performing a variable display of the second special symbol, if the high probability / second KT state, the high probability / second KT variation pattern table for the second KT shown in FIG. 8-4 (I) The variation pattern is selected and determined. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (I), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 29 to # 32. ..

  As shown in FIG. 8-4 (I), when it is determined that there is a deviation in the high-probability / second KT state, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 25 with a short variation of 1.5 seconds. There are cases where On the other hand, when the high probability / second KT state is determined to be a deviation, the second variation pattern # 30 with reach may be determined. Further, when it is determined that the small hit is in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 31 of the short variation with the variation time as short as 1.5 seconds is determined. Further, when it is determined that the big hit in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 32 with reach is determined.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 8-3 and 8-4, a shortening fluctuation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the first KT state, and a shortening fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the second KT state. However, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a shortened fluctuation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and a shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

  Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 8-5 (1) shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, and FIG. 8-5 (2) shows the variable winning ball device in the second KT state. The opening patterns of the device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 are shown.

  First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 8-5 (1). As shown in FIG. 8-5 (1), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed on the normal symbol display device 20, When it is determined to be a normal symbol, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20, and when it is determined to be out, the offset symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20. In this characteristic portion 138IW, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (1), the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the winning symbol or the deviating symbol is 0.2 seconds. ing. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (1), after the symbol fixing time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second starting winning opening opening pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds is set. After a lapse of time, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port.

  When the game ball is won in the second start winning port when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, The small hitting symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball is won in the special winning opening. It will be possible. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (1), the opening time of the downstream special variable winning ball device 17 is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the upstream variable winning ball device 17 is short. 6B has a long opening time of 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a special winning opening (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 variable displays).

  In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is finished, the opening of the next variable winning ball device 6B can be performed by the following normal symbol. It is after elapse of at least 0.5 seconds which is the sum of the variation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol fixing time of 0.2 seconds and the second starting winning opening opening pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 138IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened.

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 138IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state. After 0.5 seconds which is the sum of the variation time of the normal symbol 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds and the second starting winning opening opening pretreatment time 0.1 seconds, the game ball is The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state in the state where the normal symbol is not changed, Normally, the variable winning ball device 6B is already opened because it is shorter than the time it takes for the gaming ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after the gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not changed. When controlled to the state, the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed are easy to win in the variable winning ball device 6B.

  Next, an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 8-5 (2). As shown in FIG. 8-5 (2), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 executes the variable display of the normal symbol, When it is determined to be a normal symbol, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20, and when it is determined to be out, the offset symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20. In this characteristic portion 138IW, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (2), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 1.0 second, and the symbol determination time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the off symbol is 0.2 second. ing. When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (2), after the symbol fixing time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second starting winning opening opening pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds is set. After a lapse of time, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port.

  When the game ball is won in the second start winning port when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, The small hitting symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball is won in the special winning opening. It will be possible.

  In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extremely short at 0.2 seconds. Further, in the characteristic portion 138IW, in the second KT state, at least 3.8 seconds as the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened (ordinary symbol variation time 1.0 seconds + symbol determination time 0). A relatively long period of 2 seconds + the time before the second start winning opening opening process is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (2), the open time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short and the interval period (closed period) is long. Therefore, compared with the first KT state. The game ball easily enters the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening.

  In the second KT state, since a game ball can easily enter the special winning opening and a prize ball is easily obtained, this example is also called "small hit RUSH". In the second KT state, "small hit RUSH" Characters such as “” are displayed.

  In this example, the small hit occurs only when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and in the KT state, the small hit is likely to occur by increasing the frequency of the variable display of the second special symbol. By providing the first KT state where it is more difficult to obtain a prize ball and the second KT state where it is easier to obtain a prize ball, a small hit RUSH (in this example, the second KT state) in which a prize ball can be expected especially by a small hit is realized. However, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in both the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is not a big hit, it is configured to be a 100% small hit, It is difficult to obtain a prize ball when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the special symbol, and it is easy to obtain the prize ball when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol. It may be configured to realize a small hit RUSH (a gaming state in which the gaming value due to the small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to increase) in which a prize ball can be expected. In this way, in some form, even if the same KT state cannot be expected to win a prize ball, it may be configured to realize a small hit RUSH state in which a prize ball can be expected.

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 138IW, in the second KT state, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state. It is after the total of 3.8 seconds which is the total of the variation time of the normal symbol of 1.0 second, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds and the second starting winning opening opening pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds, and the game ball is The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, Normally, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state because it is longer than the time it takes for the gaming ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after the gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not changed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled to. Therefore, in the second KT state, the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed are difficult to win in the variable winning ball device 6B.

  In addition, in this characteristic part 138IW, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbols and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is a normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103). This is performed by executing (see step S26). Further, the game control microcomputer 100, in the normal symbol process process of step S26, whether the game state is a probability change state (high probability state), whether in the non-KT state, the first KT state or the second KT state. Regardless of whether there is a big hit game state or not, it is determined with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%) whether or not to be a universal figure hit.

  In the characteristic part 138IW, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the variation time of the normal symbol and the symbol determination time are the same each 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time is the second. A case has been shown in which the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is made different by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be different by changing the variation time and the symbol determination time between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second starting winning opening opening processing after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and if the second starting winning opening opening processing time is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. The variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to have a different closing period (interval period). Particularly, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is shortened by any of the above methods, the winning of the special winning opening in the first KT state can be suppressed. ..

  As will be described later, in the characteristic part 138IW, in the first KT state, the high base state is set by setting the high base flag indicating the high base state, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (1). As described above, the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is controlled to be opened for a long time. Further, in the second KT state, the high base flag is not set and the low base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened as shown in FIG. 8-5 (2). ing.

  In addition, for example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (1). The variable winning ball device 6B is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, the variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. 8-5 (2) is opened for a short time. You may comprise so that it may control by a 2 opening pattern (short opening). That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may be set not to be set in other states including the big hit game state.

  Even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened when the low probability / last variation display in the first KT state is executed. For example, in the shortened variation period of the special symbol of 50 times of the low probability / first KT state, the special flag may be deleted in response to the 49th variation stop of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the long open of the variable winning ball device 6B when performing the left-handed notification after the low probability / first KT state ends. be able to.

  As described above, in the case of configuring the variable winning ball device 6B using the opening control flag (special flag) of the variable winning ball device 6B, a flag for shortening fluctuation of the variable display of the special symbol is further used. The variable display of the special symbol may be controlled in this case, and in this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be separately managed.

  Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-circuited open during the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the probability of opening the variable winning ball device 6B is high in the low probability / non-KT state (left hit state), only a few game balls are operated to be fired. Thus, it is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning, and it is possible to prevent the right hitting operation from being performed during the low probability / non-KT state.

  In addition, in this characteristic part 138IW, as shown in FIG. 8-5, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, in the case where the variable display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is in a state in which the normal symbol is in a variation stop and the normal symbol is not stored. This is because the device 6B is in a closed state, and it is possible to capture with the aim of the variation stop timing of the second special symbol (in the case of a small hit, if the variation time of the normal symbol is long, the passage gate). The variable winning ball device 6B does not open by the time the game ball that has passed through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special winning opening can be won. On the other hand, in this characteristic part 138IW, by shortening the variation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened before the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Since it is set to be started, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the firing operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

  8-6 and 8-7 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 8-6, commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8030 (H) are decorations that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of special symbols. It is a production control command (fluctuation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of a symbol. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8030 (H), the variable display of the decorative pattern is started on the image display device 5. Control.

  The command 9001 (H) is a production control command (display result 1 designation command) (deletion designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is designated as a margin. Command 9002 (H) is a production control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 16R probability variation big hit. .. Command 9003 (H) is a production control command (display result 3 designation command (9R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 9R probability variation big hit. .. Command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 6R probability variation big hit. .. Command 9005 (H) is a production control command (display result 5 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 6R normal jackpot. .. Command 9006 (H) is a production control command (display result 6 designation command (2R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 2R probability variation big hit. .. Command 9007 (H) is a production control command (display result 7 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9008 (H) is an effect control command (display result 8 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

  Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 8 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this characteristic part 138IW, since the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the display control instruction command received by the production control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is It can be determined that it is a display result designation command for the first special symbol, and the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be a display result designation command for the second special symbol, so the display result Although the designation command can be combined for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be different.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send the display result designation command, but each of 15R probability variation big hit / 9R probability variation big hit / 6R probability variation big hit / 6R normal big hit / 2R probability variation big hit / 2R normal big hit / small hit / out The variation pattern command may be determined corresponding to, and the production control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

  Command A000 (H) is a production control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. Command A001 (H) is a production control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

  Command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is a production control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is a production control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designating command) that designates the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) that designates the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is a production control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare design command) for designating the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is a production control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) that specifies the end of the small hit game.

  Command B1XX (H) is a production control command (display command during the opening of the special winning opening) for designating the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds displayed in "XX" is set. Command B2XX (H) is a production control command (display command after opening the special winning opening) that specifies display after the round during the big hit game (display of interval between rounds).

  The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that the game ball has won in the special winning opening. Command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning a prize winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning award designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning award designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening in a state where the second number of reserved memories has not reached 4. It should be noted that a command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first valid start winning combination designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning combination designation command. Then, the first effective start winning award designating command and the second effective starting award winning designating command are commands indicating that there is a starting winning.

  Command C801 (H) is a production control command (gate passage designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

  Command D000 (H) is a production control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first reserved memory is not stored). Waiting demo display designation command). Command D001 (H) is a production control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Waiting demo display designation command). The first customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. The second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

  The command E000 (H) is a production control command (low probability / non-KT background designating command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designating command) that designates background display when the gaming state is low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is a production control command (high accuracy / first KT background designating command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is a production control command (high-accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the high probability / second KT state.

  When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the effect control command described above from the game control microcomputer 100 installed on the main board 11, 8-6 and the display state of the image display device 5 are changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 8-7, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. Note that production control commands other than the production control commands shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-7 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. For example, more detailed effect control commands related to the big hit game and effect control commands indicating the game state (for example, effect control commands indicating initialization commands) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  8-8 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state where the first special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is the value indicating step S110A. In addition, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A, it is in a state where the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed in the first special symbol display device 4A, and, This is a case where the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) is not being performed.

  In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 138IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is confirmed.

  If the first number of reserved memories is 0, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 138IWS52A).

  If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. In the first random number buffer area (step 138IWS53A), decrement the value of the first reserved memory number by 1 (decrement the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 138IWS54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is calculated as follows: Stored in the save area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers are always the same as the order of the first reserved storage numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the first reserved storage number and the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The extraction order is also saved so that it can be specified.

  After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 138IWS55A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, the low probability / non-KT state is determined and the low probability / non-KT background designation command is issued, and the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, the low probability / first KT state is determined, and the low probability / first KT background designation command is set. When the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, it is high probability / first KT state. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability / second KT background designation command is determined to be the high probability / second KT state, and the high precision / second KT background designation command is determined. Send.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the second special symbol is changing (step 138IWS56A). Specifically, when the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing. If it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step 138IWS66A without performing the processes of step 138IWS57A and thereafter. As a result, when the variation of the first special symbol is started during the variation of the big bonus of the second special symbol, it is configured to be forcibly disregarded regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

  The method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit variation of the second special symbol is in step 138IWS56A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment as the big hit determination random number is performed, and the process proceeds to step 138IWS58A, which causes a start winning prize. It may be forcibly disengaged regardless of whether or not the random number for jackpot determination has been acquired.

  In addition to the jackpot determination, in the gaming machine that performs the jackpot determination for determining whether or not to make a jackpot, when the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in step 138IWS56A, steps 138IWS57A to 138IWS62A Without performing the process of, set a random number value (fixed value) that is out of place as a small hit determination random number (may be the same random number as the big hit determination random number or a completely different random number) The small hit determination may be forcibly made to be disregarded regardless of which random number for the big hit determination was obtained at the time of winning the start prize.

  If the big hit of the second special symbol is not changing, the game controlling microcomputer 100 reads the big hit judging random number from the first random number storing buffer (step 138IWS57A), and executes the big hit judging module (step 138IWS58A). The big hit judging module is a program that decides to make a big hit if the big hit judging random number coincides with a predetermined big hit judging value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step 138IWS59A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 138IWS60A). . Then, based on the big hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the big hit type is a 16R certainty variation big hit, a 6R certainty variation big hit, or a 6R regular big hit (step 138IWS61A), and the big hit type is stored (step 138IWS62A), step 138IWS66A. Move to.

  If the big hit is not made in step 138IWS59A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 138IWS63A). The small hitting determination module is a program for determining that the small hitting random number (or the small hitting random number) may be a small hit if the small hitting determination value matches a predetermined small hitting determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 138IWS64A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small hit flag indicating that a small hit will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol ( Step 138IWS65A). Then, the process proceeds to step 138IWS66A.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), since the small hit determination value for the first special symbol 138IW130b is not assigned a small hit determination value, in step 138IWS63A, game control The microcomputer 100 for use has a probability of 100% and determines not to make a small hit (not to make a small hit).

  In addition to the processing mode shown in this example, for example, when it is decided not to make a big hit, the process goes unconditionally to step 138IWS66A without performing a lottery process as to whether or not to make a small hit. By doing so, it may be configured such that the probability is 100%. With such a configuration, the processing of steps 138IWS63A to S65A becomes unnecessary. Further, when it is determined not to make a big hit, it may be configured to decide to make a small hit with a low probability.

  Then, in step 138IWS66A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 138IWS66A). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step 138IWS66A.

  In addition, in step 138IWS58A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability variation big jackpot determination table or the probability variation big jackpot determination table in consideration of the game state.

  8-9 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not the special symbol time saving flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened is set. It is confirmed (step 138IWS1700A). In this example, the special symbol time saving flag is set and the shortening control of the variable display of the special symbol is performed, which makes it advantageous to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (FIG. 8-2). (See FIG. 8-4), since a small hit is likely to occur, the KT state is controlled. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern, which is not shown in FIG. 8-2 (A). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT time is selected (step 138IWS1701A). If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100, as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, KT shown in FIG. The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for time is selected (step 138IWS1702A).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100, based on the variation pattern table determined in step 138IWS1701A, S1702A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer, It is determined which one of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 8B is to be used (step 138IWS1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, the variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

  When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 138IWS1704A).

  When the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 138IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the first variation time timer and the variation time. While starting the measurement of (step 138IWS1705A), the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 138IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 138IWS1707A).

  8-10 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, first, the CPU 103, if not yet transmitted, based on the determination result of whether or not to jackpot, and the determination result of the jackpot type, one of the display result designation command (display result 1 control command, display result 2 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 5 designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 138IWS1120A).

  Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step 138IWS1121A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step 138IWS1122A), performs control to send a symbol finalization designation command to the effect control CPU120 (step 138IWS1123A). ). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 138IWS1124A).

  When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 138IWS1125A). Whether or not the big hit symbols are derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process, It can be determined by checking whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is to be set based on the variable display of the second special symbol. If the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 shifts to step 138IWS1123A and performs a control of transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 138IWS1123A), and The value of the 1 special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 138IWS1124A).

  By performing the processing of step 138IWS1125A, in this characteristic portion 138IW, if the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is forced. The special special symbols and the second special symbols are stopped at the same time so that a big hit does not occur. In this case, on the CPU 120 side for effect control, when the variable display of the first special symbol is forcedly disengaged, the variable display result of the decorative symbol is based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step S111A. As for, the control is forcibly disengaged so that the symbols are stopped and displayed.

  If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (N of step 138IWS1125A), the process is ended as it is.

  8-11 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol stop process. In the first special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step 138IWS2010A), and is "0" , And proceeds to step 138IWS2015A. When the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, when the low probability / first KT state is set, the CPU 103 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 138IWS2011A) and becomes "0". It is determined whether or not (step 138IWS2012A). If the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 138IWS2015A. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the CPU 103 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 138IWS2013A), and is in the shortening control of the variable display of the special symbol. Is reset (step 138IWS2014A). Then, the process proceeds to step 138IWS2015A.

  In this characteristic part 138IW, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of times of execution of the variable display in the high base state is managed, because of the low probability at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / It is a case where it is controlled to a high base state (low probability / first KT state) and variable display is executed 50 times. In the case of the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), when the 50th variation display is completed, it is determined as Y in steps 138IWS2012A and S2012B, and the high base flag is reset in steps 138IWS2013A and S2013B. At the same time, the special figure time saving flag is also reset in steps 138IWS2014A and S2014B, and the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is entered.

  Then, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 138IWS2015A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 138IWS2016A). When the first big hit flag is set, it indicates that the CPU 103 outputs a big hit signal 1 (a signal indicating that a big hit game is in progress) and a big hit signal 2 (a signal that indicates that a big game is in progress) to the outside. The big hit signal output flag is set (step 138IWS2022A). In the feature part 138IW, based on that the big hit signal output flag is set in step 138IWS2022A, the information output process (step S23) is executed, the big output signal 1 is started to be output to the hall computer, and the big hit signal 2 is output. If it is not during the external output of, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets the special winning opening pre-opening timer (step 138IWS2024A), sets the round 1 opening pattern data according to the big hit type (step 138IWS2025A), and sets "1" in the round number counter indicating the number of rounds of the big hit. Is set (step 138IWS2026A) and the value of the first special process flag is set to a value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (step 138IWS2027A).

  When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 138IWS2016A), the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 138IWS2028A).

  In this example, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, the right hitting notification that prompts the player to shoot a game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. There is. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, as a right hit notification, it is possible to execute a launch promotion alert that prompts the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the passage gate 41. ing.

  However, in this example, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right-handing notification and the launch promotion information are not executed, and in that state, the right-handing notification is given when the game ball wins the first starting winning opening. Or to execute the launch promotion notification (in this case, because it is in the gate passage waiting state, even if the game ball wins the first start winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol does not start immediately, and the first reserved memory Will be).

  On the other hand, when the passage of the game ball at the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the degree of recognition is low (for example, sound output of small volume or small screen display). Thus, it may be configured to perform a left-hand hit notification that prompts the player to shoot a game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected, a mode in which the degree of recognition is high (for example, a loud sound output or A left-handed notification may be provided by a large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, for the player who accidentally shoots the game ball to the right of the game area, while performing a slight left-handing notification while the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. For a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation, left-handed notification may be performed in a manner in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation can be urged by the clerk of the game store to return to the left-handed operation.

  Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of game balls detected at the passage gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. In addition, in the passage gate 41, when the game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and the second start winning opening and the special winning opening are more than a predetermined number. Even if a small number (eg, one) or more gaming balls are detected, the left-handed hit notification may be performed.

  Further, for example, while the external signal is not output when the game ball is detected at the passage gate 41, the external signal is output when the game ball is detected at the second start winning opening or the special winning opening. May be.

  The characteristic part 138IW displays a demo when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo is displayed in the normal state, the passage gate 41, the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is displayed. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demonstration display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be performed.

  8-12 is a flowchart showing a first gate passage waiting process (step S114A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input (step 138IWS2501A). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the processing ends. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103, if set, resets the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state, the high base flag, and the special time saving flag, and the high base number counter. Is cleared to 0 (step 138IWS2504A). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a first jackpot start designation command (step 138IWS2505A) and sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first jackpot opening preprocessing (step 138IWS2506A).

  In this characteristic portion 138IW, by executing the first gate passage waiting process, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the first special symbol, the big hit game is not started immediately, but the passage gate 41. The game ball passes through, and is configured to shift to the big hit game on the condition that it is detected by the gate switch 21.

  8-13 and 8-14 are flowcharts showing the first jackpot end process (step S118A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first big hit ending process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step 138IWS2200A), and when the big hit end display timer is set, moves to step 138IWS2204A. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the first big hit flag is reset (step 138IWS2201A), and control for transmitting the first big hit end designation command is performed (step 138IWS2202A). Then, the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) (step 138IWS2203A), and the process is ended.

  In step 138IWS2204A, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 138IWS2204A). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step 138IWS2205A). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has passed (Y in step 138IWS2205A), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is the 16R certainty variation jackpot (step 138IWS2206A). Whether or not the 16R probability variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step 138IWS62A of the first special symbol normal process. If the 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag indicating that it is a probability variation state and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 138IWS2207A), and is under the control of shortening the variation display of the special symbol. A special figure time saving flag indicating that is set and the state shifts to the KT state (step 138IWS2208A). Then, the process proceeds to step 138IWS2223A. In the case of the 16R probability variation big hit, since the high base flag is not set, the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is controlled.

  If it is not the 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot completed this time is 6R probability variation jackpot (step 138IWS2209A). Whether or not the 6R probability variation big hit can be determined by, for example, confirming the big hit type stored in step 138IWS62A of the first special symbol normal process. If the 6R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 138IWS2212A), and sets the high base flag to shift to the high base state (step 138IWS2213A), Further, the special drawing time saving flag is set and the state shifts to the KT state (step 138IWS2214A). Then, the process proceeds to step 138IWS2223A. Therefore, in the case of a 6R probability variation big hit, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

  In the case of a 6R probability variation big hit, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the big hit game is started (see step 138IWS2504A of the first gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on 6R probability variation jackpot is controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), since the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the variable display thereafter, It is determined as Y in step 138IWS2010A of the first special symbol stop processing, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter of step 138IWS2011A is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  If it is not the 6R probability variation big hit (that is, if it is the 6R normal big hit), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 138IWS2219A), and sets the special figure time saving flag to the KT state. The process moves (step 138IWS2220A). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step 138IWS2221A). Then, the process proceeds to step 138IWS2223A. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal big hit, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) (step 138IWS2223A).

  8-15 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, it is a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is not made in the second special symbol display device 4B. And, it is a case where neither the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened) is being played.

  In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 138IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is confirmed.

  If the number of second reserved memories is 0, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 138IWS52B).

  If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. Stored in the second random number buffer area (step 138IWS53B), decrement the value of the second reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the second reserved storage counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 138IWS54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Stored in the save area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved storage numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved storage numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

  After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 138IWS55B). The specific method of transmitting the background designating command is the same as the processing shown in step 138IWS55A of the first special symbol normal processing.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the first special symbol is changing (step 138IWS56B). Specifically, when the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is based on the variation display of the first special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing. When it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step 138IWS66B without performing the processes of step 138IWS57B and subsequent steps. As a result, when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the variation of the big bonus of the first special symbol, the configuration is forcibly deviated regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

  The method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 138IWS56B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment as a big hit determination random number is performed, and the process proceeds to step 138IWS58B, which causes a start winning prize. It may be forcibly disengaged regardless of whether or not the random number for jackpot determination has been acquired.

  In addition, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 138IWS56B, the small hit determination random number (the same random number as the big hit determination random number may be used without performing the processes of step 138IWS57B to S62B. , A completely different random number may be set), and a small random number value (fixed value) is set to make a small hit determination, so that it is forced regardless of which big hit determination random number was obtained at the time of starting winning. It may be out of alignment.

  When the big hit of the first special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the big hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 138IWS57B), and executes the big hit determination module (step 138IWS58B). The big hit judging module is a program that decides to make a big hit if the big hit judging random number coincides with a predetermined big hit judging value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step 138IWS59B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step 138IWS60B). . Then, based on the big hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the big hit type is a 16R certainty change big hit, a 9R certainty change big hit, a 2R certainty change big hit, or a 2R normal big hit (step 138IWS61B), and the big hit type is stored (step 138IWS62B). ), And proceeds to step 138IWS66B.

  If the big hit is not made in step 138IWS59B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 138IWS63B). The small hitting determination module is a program for determining that the small hitting random number (or the small hitting random number) may be a small hit if the small hitting determination value matches a predetermined small hitting determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 138IWS64B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variable display of the second special symbol ( Step 138IWS65B). Then, the process proceeds to step 138IWS66B.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (C), in the small hit determination table 138IW130c for the second special symbol, in the uncertain variation small hit determination table, the uncertain variation state (low probability state) All the judgment values (225 to 65535) except the big hit judgment value (0 to 224) are assigned as the small hit judgment value, and in the probability variation small hit judgment table, the big hit judgment value (0 in the probability change state (high probability state)). Since all the judgment values (2250 to 65535) except (2250 to 2249) are assigned as the small hit judgment values, in step 138IWS63B, the game control microcomputer 100 decides to make a small hit with a probability of 100%. To do.

  In addition to the processing mode shown in this example, for example, when it is decided not to make a big hit, the second small hit flag is unconditionally kept as it is without performing a lottery process as to whether or not to make a small hit. By setting, a small hit may be made with a probability of 100%. With such a configuration, the processing of steps 138IWS63B and S64B becomes unnecessary. Further, when it is decided not to make a big hit, it may be decided to make a deviation with a low probability.

  Then, in step 138IWS66B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 138IWS66B). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined just before step 138IWS66B.

  In addition, in step 138IWS58B, in consideration of the game state, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit, by using either the non-probability variation big jackpot determination table or the probability variation big jackpot determination table.

  The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 8-9. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 8-9, the second variation pattern process is explained by replacing “first” with “second”. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 138IWS1700A and confirms whether the special figure time saving flag is set. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern, which is not shown in FIG. 8-3 (C). The variation pattern table for the second special symbol for KT is selected. If the special time saving flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 changes depending on whether or not the probability change flag and the high base flag are set, and the number of changes. As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for any of the KTs shown in FIGS. 8-3 (D) to 8-4 (I) is selected. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), if it is the first variation, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-3 (D) If the 2nd to 49th variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 8-3 (E) is selected, and if it is the 50th variation, the second variation shown in FIG. 8-3 (F). Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. Further, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (if the high probability / first KT state), if it is the first variation, the variation for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-4 (G). The pattern table is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-4 (H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 8-4 (I) is selected.

  The second special symbol variation process is the same as the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) shown in FIG. 8-10. That is, in the first special symbol variation process shown in FIG. 8-10, if the “first” is replaced with the “second”, the second special symbol variation process is explained.

  8-16 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol stop process. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 138IWS2010B), and if "0", proceeds to step 138IWS2015B. When the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, when the low probability / first KT state is set, the CPU 103 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 138IWS2011B) and becomes "0". It is determined whether or not (step 138IWS2012B). When the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 138IWS2015B. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the CPU 103 resets the high base flag (step 138IWS2013B) and also resets the special figure time saving flag (step 138IWS2014B). Then, the process proceeds to step 138IWS2015B.

  Next, the CPU 103 causes the stop symbol of the second special symbol to be derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 138IWS2015B). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 138IWS2016B). When the second big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 138IWS2021B). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the process directly proceeds to step 138IWS2024B.

  If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the CPU 103 sets the big hit signal output flag (step 138IWS2022B). In the feature part 138IW, the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the big hit signal output flag being set in step 138IWS2022B, and the big output signal 1 is started to be output to the hall computer externally. If it is not during the external output of, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets a special winning opening pre-opening timer (step 138IWS2024B), sets round 1 opening pattern data according to the big hit type (step 138IWS2025B), and sets "1" to the round number counter (step 138IWS2026B), and the value of the second special figure process flag is set to a value corresponding to the second gate passage waiting process (step 138IWS2027B).

  If the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 138IWS2016B), the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 138IWS2028B).

  8-17 is a flowchart showing a second gate passage waiting process in the second special symbol process process. In the second gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input (step 138IWS2501B). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the processing ends. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 138IWS2502B). If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the process directly proceeds to step 138IWS2504B.

  If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the CPU 103 sets the big hit signal output flag (step 138IWS2503B). In the characteristic part 138IW, based on the fact that the big hit signal output flag is set in step 138IWS2503B, the information output process (step S23) is executed, the big output signal 1 is started to be output to the hall computer, and the big hit signal 2 is output. When the external output is not being performed, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

  Next, the CPU 103 resets the probability variation flag, the high base flag, and the special drawing time saving flag if set, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 (step 138IWS2504B). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a second big hit start designation command (step 138IWS2505B), and sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second big hit opening preprocessing (step 138IWS2506B).

  In this characteristic portion 138IW, the second gate passage waiting process is executed, so that the big hit game is not started immediately when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the second special symbol, but the passage gate 41 The game ball passes through, and is configured to shift to the big hit game on the condition that it is detected by the gate switch 21.

  8-18 and 8-19 are flowcharts showing the second jackpot end processing in the second special symbol process processing. In the second big hit ending process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step 138IWS2200B), and if the big hit end display timer is set, moves to step 138IWS2204B. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the second big hit flag is reset (step 138IWS2201B), and the control of transmitting the second big hit end designation command is performed (step 138IWS2202B). Then, the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) (step 138IWS2203B), and the process is ended.

  In step 138IWS2204B, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 138IWS2204B). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step 138IWS2205B). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has passed (Y in step 138IWS2205B), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the type of the big hit that ended this time is 16R certainty variation big hit or 2R certainty variation big hit (step 138IWS2206B). Whether or not it is the 16R certainty jackpot or the 2R certainty jackpot can be determined by, for example, checking the jackpot type stored in step 138IWS62B of the second special symbol normal processing. If the 16R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 138IWS2207B), and sets the special figure time saving flag to shift to the KT state ( Step 138IWS2208B). Then, the process proceeds to step 138IWS2223B. When the 16R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit, the high base flag is not set, so the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is controlled.

  If neither the 16R certainty variation jackpot nor the 2R certainty variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot finished this time is the 9R certainty variation jackpot (step 138IWS2209B). Whether or not it is the 9R certainty variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 138IWS62B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is the 9R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 138IWS2212B), and sets the high base flag to shift to the high base state (step 138IWS2213B), Further, the special figure time saving flag is set to shift to the KT state (step 138IWS2214B). Then, the process proceeds to step 138IWS2223B. Therefore, in the case of the 9R probability variation big hit, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

  In the case of a 9R probability variation big hit, the high base flag is only set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when starting the big hit game (see step 138IWS2504B of the second gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on the 9R certainty variation jackpot is controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and since the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the variable display thereafter, In the second special symbol stop process, it is determined as Y in step 138IWS2010B, and the subtraction process of the high base number counter of step 138IWS2011B is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  If it is not the 9R probability variation big hit (that is, if it is the 2R normal big hit), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 138IWS2219B), and sets the special figure time saving flag to the KT state. The process moves (step 138IWS2220B). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step 138IWS2221B). Then, the process proceeds to step 138IWS2223B. Therefore, in the case of a 2R normal big hit, the probability is controlled to be a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 138IWS2223B).

  Here, the transition of the game state in the characteristic portion 138IW will be described. FIG. 8-20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a way of transition of the game state in the characteristic unit 138IW. First, in the characteristic portion 138IW, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player aims at the left side of the game area and performs a shooting operation (left hit) of the game ball. Therefore, in the normal state, mainly the start winning to the first start winning opening occurs, mainly the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, a 16R sure change big hit, a 6R sure change big hit, or a 6R normal big hit occurs mainly.

  As shown in FIG. 8-20, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) shifts after the end of the big hit game, The high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 138IWS2206A to S2208A). In addition, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, it shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game until the next big hit occurs. The high probability / high base state is maintained (see steps 138IWS2209A, S2212A to S2214A). In addition, when the 6R normal big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, after the big hit game ends, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is entered, and the next big hit occurs? The low-probability / high-base state is maintained until the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 138IWS2219A to S2221A).

  In the case where it is after the transition to the KT state (high-probability / high-base state, low-probability / high-base state, high-probability / low-base state), in this feature 138IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. And perform the shooting operation (right hit) of the game ball. Therefore, in the KT state, a start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and a variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Also, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, mainly a 16R certainty big hit, a 9R certainty big jackpot, a 2R certainty big jackpot, or a 2R normal big hit occurs.

  As shown in Fig. 8-20, when 16R certainty variation big hit or 2R certainty variation big hit occurs in high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), high probability / low base state after the big hit game ends. (High probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps 138IWS2206B to S2208B). In addition, when the 9R certainty jackpot occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the game shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game is over. , The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps 138IWS2209B, S2212B to S2214B). In addition, in the characteristic portion 138IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being the 9R certainty variation jackpot is 50% in total (see FIGS. 8-1 (D) and (E)). ), Once the high probability / high base state is reached, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%. Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the big hit game is over. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is finished (see steps 138IWS2219B to S2221B).

  As shown in FIG. 8-20, when a 16R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs in a low-probability / high-base state (low-probability / first KT state), a high-probability / low-base state after the jackpot game ends. (High probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps 138IWS2206B to S2208B). In addition, when the 9R certainty variation big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the big hit game ends. , The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps 138IWS2209B, S2212B to S2214B). Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the big hit game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is finished (see steps 138IWS2219B to S2221B). In the characteristic portion 138IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being a 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see FIGS. 8-1 (D) and (E)), Once in the low probability / high base state, the low probability / high base state will loop at a rate of 35%. After the 6R regular jackpot and the 2R regular jackpot have occurred and the low probability / high base state has been reached, the next jackpot does not occur and the variable display of 50 times is completed. As shown, a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is entered (see steps 138IWS2010A to S2014A).

  As shown in FIG. 8-20, when a 16R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs in a high-probability / low-base state (high-probability / second KT state), a high-probability / low-base state after the jackpot game ends. (High probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps 138IWS2206B to S2208B). In addition, in this characteristic part 138IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being 16R certainty variation jackpot or 2R certainty variation jackpot is 15 % (See FIGS. 8-1 (D) and (E)), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 15%. In addition, when the 9R certainty variation big hit occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), it shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the big hit game ends. , The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps 138IWS2209B and S2212B to S2214B). Also, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high-probability / low-base state (high-probability / second KT state), it shifts to a low-probability / high-base state (low-probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 138IWS2219B to S2221B).

  In addition, in FIG. 8-20, the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) describes the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, but the variation of the second special symbol at a low rate. It is possible that the display may be performed. In this case, when the 16R certainty variation big hit or the 2R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when the 9R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next big hit occurs or the 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

  Further, in FIG. 8-20, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). Also, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

  In addition, in FIG. 8-20, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). Also, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

  Further, in FIG. 8-20, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). Also, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

  8-21 are explanatory diagrams for explaining an external output signal output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. The prize ball signal is assigned to the terminal 01 of the external output terminal board. The prize ball signal is a signal output externally every time a predetermined number (10 in this example) of prize balls are paid out. The jackpot signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 05 of the external output terminal board. The big hit signal 1 is a signal that is continuously output to the outside during the entire big hit game (that is, a signal indicating that the big hit game is being played). The jackpot signal 2 is assigned to the terminal 06 of the external output terminal board. The big hit signal 2 is a signal that is continuously output to the outside during the period of all big hit games and during the KT state (that is, a signal indicating that the player is in a camp). A special winning opening signal is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal Slope. The special winning opening winning signal is a signal externally output based on the detection of the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening. Further, the expected number of prize balls signal is assigned to the terminal 09 of the external output terminal board. The expected number of prize balls signal is a signal that is externally output each time the expected number of prize balls to be paid out reaches a predetermined number (10 in this example).

  Each external signal shown in FIGS. 8 to 21 has, for example, a timing at which ten prize balls are paid out, a timing at which a big hit occurs, a timing at which a prize is generated at a special winning opening, or a planned number of prize balls reaches 10. A flag corresponding to the output of the external signal at timing (see, for example, step 138IWS2021A, S2023A, S2022B, S2023B, S2503B) and a timer are set, and based on the setting of the flag and the timer, information output processing (step When S23) is executed, it is externally output to a hall computer or the like.

  Next, the output timing of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2 of the external output signals will be described. FIG. 8-22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining output timings of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2. In this example, the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the fact that the jackpot signal output flag is set in steps 138IWS2022A and S2503B when the gaming state is the normal state, and jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 are executed. The external output of is started. After that, in the information output process (step S23), the external output of the big hit signal 1 is stopped at the timing when the big hit game is finished. Further, in the information output process (step S23), the external output of the big hit signal 2 is stopped at the timing when the KT state is ended. On the other hand, based on the fact that the jackpot signal output flag is set in steps 138IWS2022A and S2022B when the gaming state is the KT state, the information output process (step S23) is executed, and the jackpot signal 1 is externally output. It In this case, since the KT state is in progress, the big hit signal 2 is continuously output to the outside. After that, in the information output process (step S23), the external output of the big hit signal 1 is stopped at the timing when the big hit game is finished.

  First, the output timing of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2 when the game state is the normal state (low probability / non-KT state) will be described with reference to FIG. 8-22 (1). As shown in FIG. 8-22 (1), when the game state is the normal state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. At the same timing, the external output of the big hit signal 1 is started, and the external output of the big hit signal 2 is started (see step 138IWS2022A). On the other hand, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2 The external output is not started, and the external output of the big hit signal 1 is started and the external output of the big hit signal 2 is started at the timing when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 (see step 138IWS2503B).

  Next, using FIG. 8-22 (2), the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot when the game state is the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state) The output timing of the signal 2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-22 (2), when the gaming state is the KT state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the big hit symbol is displayed as a derivation display, the big hit symbol is displayed as a derivation display. External output of the jackpot signal 1 is started at the timing (see step 138IWS2022A). In addition, when the game state is the KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the external output of the big jackpot signal 1 at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. It is started (see step 138IWS2022B). As shown in FIG. 8-22 (2), in the KT state, the big hit signal 2 is continuously output to the outside.

  Next, the normal symbol process process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 8-23 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol process process. In the normal symbol process process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 and the gate switch 21 has been turned on (step 138IWS5111), Control for transmitting a gate passage designation command to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (step 138IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes a gate switch passage process (step 138IWS5113).

  In this characteristic part 138IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected by executing the processing of steps 138IWS5111-S5113, a gate passage designation command is transmitted. In addition, in this characteristic portion 138IW, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays a role of an operation area. Regardless of whether it passes or not, the gate passage designation command is transmitted.

  Then, the CPU 103 executes any one of the processes shown in steps 138IWS5100 to S5104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

  In addition, in this characteristic part 138IW, regardless of whether it is in the gate passage waiting state or not, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected in step 138IWS5111, the gate switch passage process of step 138IWS5113 is executed. Normally, variable display of symbols is executed, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 when not in the gate passage waiting state, the variable display of the ordinary symbol is executed, and in the state of waiting for the gate passage, the regular symbol even if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41. The variable display may be configured not to be executed.

  Further, in this characteristic portion 138IW, the passage gate 41 is normally used as a combined gate of the starting region and the operating region, but the special symbol process process (see steps S25A and S25B) is normally performed in the timer interrupt process. Since it is executed before the symbol process process (see step S26), after the detection process of the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the operating region is performed, the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the normal starting region is performed. Detection processing is performed. Therefore, the process for starting the big hit game can be executed quickly.

  Gate switch passage process (step 138IWS5113): The CPU 103 causes the count value (gate passage memory number) of the gate passage memory counter (counter for counting the number of game balls passing through the passage gate 41) to be the maximum value (in this example, " 4 ”) has been reached. If it has not reached the maximum value, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one. It should be noted that the LED of the universal figure reservation display 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number per ordinary symbol for determination, and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of passing memories.

  Normal symbol normal processing (step 138IWS5100): CPU103 is a state in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol can be started (for example, if the value of the normal symbol process flag is the value indicating step 138IWS5100, specifically, the regular symbol) If the variable display of the normal symbol is not displayed on the display device 20, and the variable winning ball device 6B is not opened / closed based on the fact that the normal symbol display device 20 hits and displays the symbol), the gate passage memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passage memory number counter is confirmed. If the number of memory passing through the gate is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is to be the hit symbol). Then, the variable time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 138IWS5101).

  Normal symbol variation processing (step 138IWS5101): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time to the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step 138IWS5102).

  Normal symbol stop processing (step 138IWS5102): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a falling symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "0") indicating the normal symbol normal process (step 138IWS5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal symbol process timer is set to the time before the normal electric accessory release, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric auditors product opening preprocessing (step 138IWS5103).

  Normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step 138IWS5103): CPU103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out. To start opening the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "4") indicating the normal electric auditors product operating process (step 138IWS5104).

  Normal electric auditors product operation process (step 138IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, closes the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step 138IWS5100).

  8-24 is a flow chart showing a normal symbol normal process (step 138IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gate passage memory number is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passage memory number counter (step 138IWS5121). If the gate passage memory number is 0 (Y in step 138IWS5121), the process ends. If the gate passage memory number is not 0 (N in step 138IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads the normal symbol per determination random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passage memory number = 1 (step 138IWS5122). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passage memory number counter by 1 and shifts the content of each storage area (step 138IWS5123). That is, the random number for normal symbol per determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memory = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memory = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the normal symbol per determination random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each gate passing memory number is always the order of gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 and It is supposed to match.

  Next, the CPU 103 uses a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to make a normal symbol, and performs a lottery process based on a random number (ordinary symbol per determination random number value) to determine whether or not to make a normal symbol. It is determined (step 138IWS5127). Note that, in this characteristic unit 138IW, in step 138IWS5127, the CPU 103 uniformly sets the value to 99/100 regardless of whether it is the probable variation state, the KT state, or the high base state. It is decided to be a normal symbol with probability.

  In step 138IWS5127, when the read random number per normal symbol for judgment is within the range of hit (in the case of hit), the CPU 103 sets the hit symbol as the display result (step 138IWS5128), and proceeds to step 138IWS5130. Further, in step 138IWS5127, when the read random number per normal symbol for judgment is not within the hit range (when it is out of alignment), the CPU 103 sets an outlier as a display result (step 138IWS5129), and proceeds to step 138IWS5130.

  In step 138IWS5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y in step 138IWS5130, S5131). If the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (N of step 138IWS5130, S5132).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, "1") indicating the normal symbol fluctuation process (step 138IWS5101) (step 138IWS5133).

  FIG. 8-25 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop processing (step 138IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step 138IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 138IWS3702). Normally, if the symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 138IWS3702), the process is ended as it is.

  When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has passed (Y in step 138IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (hit in step 138IWS5127). (Whether or not it is determined) is confirmed (step 138IWS3703). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol is set, for example, by setting a normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step 138IWS5127, and whether or not the flag is set is confirmed. You can

  When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a hit symbol, but a deviating symbol (N in step 138IWS3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the ordinary symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 138IWS5100) ( Specifically, it is updated to "0" (step 138IWS3708).

  In step 138IWS3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y in step 138IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 138IWS3704), and if it is set, That is, in the case of the first KT state, 0.1 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 138IWS3706). Moreover, when the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 138IWS3705). ..

  Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric auditors product opening preprocessing (step 138IWS5103) (step 138IWS3707).

  FIG. 8-26 is a flowchart showing the normal electric auditors product opening preprocessing (step 138IWS5103). In the normal electric accessory release preprocessing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step 138IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 138IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 138IWS3802), the process is terminated as it is.

  When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before the opening of the normal electric accessory (Y in step 138IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 138IWS3803). If it is set, that is, if it is in the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release time (step 138IWS3805). Moreover, when the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set to the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release time (step 138IWS3804).

  As described above, in the characteristic part 138IW, the normal electric auditors product opening time is set to 5.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the normal electric auditors object opening time is set to 0.2 seconds in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is a state in which it is easier to make a start winning at the second start winning opening than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, the first KT state is configured so that the game ball does not easily reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than the normal state or the second KT state.

  The control method for facilitating the starting winning in the second starting winning opening when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in the characteristic portion 138IW. For example, in the case of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened more times than in the case of the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B). 6B may be set as the number of times of opening 6B, whereas in the first KT state, the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 6B may be set as 2). By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to facilitate the starting winning in the second starting winning opening.

  Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state, the control for increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B and the variable winning ball device 6B. May be executed in combination with a control for increasing the number of times of release of the.

  Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state (step 138IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the normal electric auditors product operating process (step 138IWS5104) (step 138IWS3807).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 8-27 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 138IWS611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 138IWS612). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 138IWS613). The reason why +2 is performed is that two bytes (one command) are read.

  If the received production control command is the special winning opening winning designation command (step 138IWS614), the production control CPU 120 counts the prize balls generated during the period in which the small hits continuously occur in the second KT state. The value of the small winning continuous medium prize ball number counter is added by 15 (step 138IWS615). Next, the effect control CPU 120, based on the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter after the addition, occurs in the image display device 5 during the period in which the small hits continuously occur in the second KT state. If the small hit continuous medium prize ball count display 1 indicating the number of prize balls is displayed, control is performed to update the small hit continuous middle prize ball count display 1 (step 138IWS616).

  In addition, in this example, the small hit continuous medium award ball number display 1 is started when a 16R certainty variation big hit or a 2R certainty variation big hit occurs in the normal state or the first KT state, and other than 16R certainty variation big hit or 2R certainty variation big hit. The display is terminated when a big hit of (1) occurs (that is, when the second KT state is terminated).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the small winning continuous medium prize ball number counter after addition is equal to or more than any threshold value (step 138IWS617). If the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter after addition is equal to or more than any threshold value, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after addition. The control for displaying the small winning continuous award ball number display 2 according to is performed (step 138IWS618). For example, if the value of the small winning continuous medium award ball counter after addition is 1000 or 1005, 1010, it means that the number of award balls has reached 1000 by the prize winning at this time. Therefore, it is determined that the threshold “1000” has been reached, and the small hit continuous medium prize ball count display 2 indicating that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 is displayed. For example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "1000 OVER" as the small winning continuous award ball number display 2.

  If the received effect control command is a special winning award winning designation command (step 138IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter (step 138IWS620). Next, the effect control CPU 120, based on the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter after the addition, if the small hit continuous medium prize ball number display 1 is displayed on the image display device 5, the small hit continuous. Control for updating the middle prize number display 1 is performed (step 138IWS621).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the small winning continuous medium prize ball number counter after addition is equal to or more than any threshold value (step 138IWS622). If the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter after addition is equal to or more than any threshold value, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after addition. The control for displaying the small winning continuous middle award number display 2 according to is performed (step 138IWS623). For example, if the value of the small winning continuous medium prize ball number counter after addition is 1000 or 1005, it means that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 by the prize winning in this time. Therefore, it is determined that the threshold value “1000” has been reached, and the small winning continuous award ball number display 2 indicating that the number of award balls has reached 1000 is displayed. For example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "1000 OVER" as the small winning continuous award ball number display 2.

  In this example, the case where the small hit continuous medium prize ball number display 1 is updated or the small hit continuous medium prize ball number display 2 is displayed based on the winning in the special winning opening or the special winning opening is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even when a winning is made to the general winning opening 10 during the continuous small hit in the second KT state, the value corresponding to the number of prize balls for the winning at the general winning opening 10 is set to the number of small winning continuous medium winning balls. It may be added to the counter to update the small hit continuous middle prize ball count display 1 or display the small hit continuous middle prize ball count display 2.

  If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 120 executes processing of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag according to the received effect control command (step 138IWS624). ). For example, when the fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation pattern command is stored in the fluctuation pattern command storage area provided in the RAM 122 and the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set. Then, the process proceeds to step 138IWS611.

  Further, in the present characteristic part 138IW, the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) executes the demo display control process in, for example, the effect control process process (step S76). FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29 are flowcharts showing the demo display control processing. In the demo display control process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first customer waiting demo display designation command has been received (step 138IWS4701), and if not received, the process proceeds to step 138IWS4706. If it is received, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal state (step 138IWS4702). If it is not in the normal state, the process proceeds to step 138IWS4705. Specifically, if neither the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state nor the second KT state flag indicating the second KT state is set, it is determined to be the normal state.

  Whether or not the first customer waiting demo display designation command is received is determined by, for example, when the first customer waiting demo display designation command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). A flag indicating that the designated command has been received may be set, and in step 138IWS4701, it may be confirmed whether or not the flag is set.

  Further, the first KT state flag and the second KT state flag are, for example, in the command analysis process (step S75), a low-accuracy / first KT background designation command, a high-accuracy / first KT background designation command, a high-accuracy / second KT background designation. Set based on receipt of command.

  In the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first demo standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to the time (for example, 30 seconds) until the first demo display is started (step 138IWS4703), A first demo standby flag indicating that the first demo display is on standby is set (step 138IWS4704). Then, the first demo reception flag is reset (step 138IWS4705).

  After that, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the first demo standby flag is set (step 138IWS4706), and if it is set, the first special symbol variation is started (step 138IWS4707). Y), or when the big hit game state is controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step 138IWS4708), the process proceeds to step 138IWS4712. As a result, when the first special symbol variation is started or the big hit game state is controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol, the first demo display is not executed. Specifically, in step 138IWS4707, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the first special symbol is received, it is determined that the first special symbol variation is started. In step 138IWS4708, when the second big hit start designation command is received, it is determined that the big hit game state is controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol.

  The first demo waiting flag is set, the first special symbol fluctuation is not started (step 138IWS4707 N), and if the big hit game state is not controlled based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (N of step 138IWS4708) , The value of the first demo standby timer is decremented by 1 (step 138IWS4709), and when the first demo standby timer times out (step 138IWS4710 Y), the first demo display is started (step 138IWS4711), and the first demo is displayed. The standby flag is reset (step 138IWS4712).

  After that, if the CPU 120 for effect control is in the first demonstration display (Y of step 138IWS4713), the variation of the first special symbol is started (Y of step 138IWS4714), or based on the variation of the second special symbol. When the jackpot gaming state is controlled (Y in step 138IWS4715), the first demo display is ended (step 138IWS4716).

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command has been received (step 138IWS4801), and if not received, the process proceeds to step 138IWS4806. If it is received, it is determined whether or not it is in the KT state (step 138IWS4802), and if it is not in the KT state, the process proceeds to step 138IWS4805. Specifically, if either the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set, it is determined to be the KT state.

  Whether or not the second customer waiting demo display designating command is received is determined by, for example, when the second customer waiting demo display designating command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). A flag indicating that the designated command has been received may be set, and in step 138IWS4801, it may be confirmed whether or not the flag is set.

  In the KT state, the effect control CPU 120 sets the second demo standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to the time (for example, 30 seconds) until the second demo display is started (step 138IWS4803), A second demo standby flag indicating that the second demo display is on standby is set (step 138IWS4804). Then, the second demo reception flag is reset (step 138IWS4805).

  After that, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the second demo standby flag is set (step 138IWS4806), and if it is set, the second special symbol variation is started (step 138IWS4807). Y), or if it is not in the KT state (N in step 138IWS4808), the process proceeds to step 138IWS4812. As a result, when the second special symbol variation starts or the KT state ends, the second demo display is not executed. Specifically, in step 138IWS4807, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the second special symbol is received, it is determined that the second special symbol variation is started. Also, in step 138IWS4808, if neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set, it is determined that the KT state has ended.

  The second demo waiting flag is set, the second special symbol fluctuation is not started (N of step 138IWS4807), if the KT state is not finished (Y of step 138IWS4808), the value of the second demo waiting timer Is decremented by 1 (step 138IWS4809), and when the second demo standby timer times out (step 138IWS4810 Y), the second demo display is started (step 138IWS4811) and the second demo standby flag is reset (step 138IWS4812). ).

  After that, if the second demonstration display is being performed (Y in step 138IWS4813), the CPU 120 for effect control starts changing the second special symbol (Y in step 138IWS4814), or if the KT state ends (step). (N of 138IWS4815), the second demo display is ended (step 138IWS4816).

  FIG. 8-30 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command is received (step 138IWS811). Whether the variation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, in the command analysis process (step S75), when the variation pattern command is received, a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command is received is set. In step 138IWS811, it is only necessary to confirm whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set.

  If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 138IWS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step 138IWS813). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation pattern # 01 to # 07. It can be determined by confirming that. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), the process is ended as it is. When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 138IWS815).

  If the 1st KT state flag or the 2nd KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is the KT state), the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not it is the time to execute the variable display of the second special symbol. (Step 138IWS814). Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns # 01 to # 32. It can be determined by confirming that. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol is executed (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed), the process is ended as it is. When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the CPU 120 for effect control updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 138IWS816).

  By performing the processing of steps 138IWS812 to S815, in the characteristic part 138IW, in the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbols is displayed in the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of the first special symbol. When it is executed and in the KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed on the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, or when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, , The variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed.

  FIG. 8-31 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 138IWS920). In the characteristic part 138IW, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be off), the left middle and right decorative patterns are completely inconsistent, and only the left or right decorative patterns are matched. Determine the combination of out-of-reach patterns. Further, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 16R probability variation big hit), the combination of the symbols arranged in the symbol "7" among the odd-numbered symbols is determined. In addition, when the display result 3 designation command and the display result 4 designation command are received (when it is determined to be the 9R certainty variation jackpot or the 6R certainty variation jackpot), the decoration symbol on the left middle right is an odd number symbol other than "7". Decide the combination of the arranged symbols. In addition, when the display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 2R probability variation big hit), the combination of symbols including the special symbol (the symbol "R" in this example) as the decorative symbol in the symbol is determined. .. Further, when the display result 5 designation command or the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit), a combination of symbols in which the left middle right decorative pattern is arranged in an even number pattern To decide. When the display result 8 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), a combination of decorative symbols of the small hit design (for example, “135”) is determined.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display started this time is a big hit (step 138IWS921). Whether or not there is a big hit change can be determined by, for example, checking whether or not the received display result designation command is any one of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 7 designation command. If it is not a big hit variation, the process directly proceeds to step 138IWS933.

  If it is a big hit variation, the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not the re-lottery stock flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is being stocked is set (step IWS922). If the re-lottery stock flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the re-lottery stock image displayed on the image display device 5 (step 138IWS923) and reset the re-lottery stock flag ( Step 138IWS924). Further, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to be used and the re-lottery release effect according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command (step 138IWS925). Then, the process proceeds to step 138IWS934.

  In the characteristic part 138IW, the re-lottery release effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol by executing step 138IWS935 and a variable display effect process (step S172) described later according to the process table selected in step 138IWS925. To be done.

  If the re-lottery stock flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display that is started this time is a 2R certainty variation jackpot (step 138IWS926). Whether or not the variable display is a 2R certainty variation jackpot can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the received display result designation command is the display result 6 designation command. If the variation display does not result in a 2R certainty variation big hit, the process directly proceeds to step 138IWS932.

  If the variable display is a 2R probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 120 executes effect determination processing for determining whether to execute the re-lottery effect or the notification at the time of passing through the gate (step 138IWS927). In this example, as already described, when the 2R probability variation big hit, the number of rounds of the big hit game is as small as two rounds and a prize ball cannot be expected compared to other big hits, but the probability variation state is controlled and the KT state is changed. Among them, the jackpot is advantageous in that it is controlled to the particularly advantageous second KT state. Therefore, in the case of a 2R certainty variation jackpot, the present feature unit 138IW executes the re-lottery effect and the notification at the time of passing through the gate to temporarily display as if it was a normal jackpot, and then the second KT state. By notifying that the game will be controlled, the interest in the game can be increased.

  The "re-lottery effect" means that the normal big hit pattern (non-probability variation big hit pattern) is temporarily stopped and displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, then the decorative pattern is variably displayed again, and the final variable display result is notified. It is a production. In the present example, when the re-lottery effect is executed, thereafter, the KT plunging effect indicating that the KT state (the second KT state in the present example) is entered is executed.

  In the present example, when the re-lottery effect is executed, the normal big hit symbol is temporarily displayed, and the 16R probability variation big hit symbol is temporarily stopped, and the re-lottery effect and the KT plunge effect are displayed. It is configured to never run. With such a configuration, even if the most advantageous 16R probability variation big hit symbol is displayed, a situation in which a disadvantageous state is subsequently notified (a notification that the degree of advantage is reduced is prevented) is prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, in this example, when the re-lottery effect is executed, after the normal big hit symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the 2R probability variation big hit symbol is always finally stopped and displayed, but such a mode I can't stop. For example, even if it becomes 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit, it is configured to be able to execute the re-lottery effect, and after the re-lottery effect is executed and the normal big hit symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, finally the 6R normal big hit or 2R It may be configured such that it may inform that it is a normal big hit. Further, for example, even if the 16R probability variation jackpot, 9R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, the re-lottery effect is configured to be executable, and after the re-lottery effect is executed and the normal jackpot symbol is temporarily stopped, it is finally displayed. It may be configured to notify the 16R probability variation big hit, the 9R probability variation big hit, and the 6R probability variation big hit.

  "Notification at the time of passing through the gate" is a notification of the fact that the normal big hit symbol is finally stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the 2R probability variation big hit is based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. is there.

  In step 138IWS927, the effect control CPU 120 performs the lottery process based on the random number by using the effect determination table for determining whether to execute the re-lottery effect or the notification when passing through the gate, and the re-lottery effect or the passage through the gate. It is determined whether or not the time notification is executed. FIG. 8-32 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 8-32, in this example, it is determined that the re-lottery effect is executed with a probability of 30%, and the notification at the time of passing the gate is executed with a probability of 30%. Note that, not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, the re-lottery effect may be configured to be determined at a higher rate than the gate-passage notification, or the gate-passage notification of the re-lottery effect is determined. Alternatively, it may be configured to determine a higher rate.

  When it is determined to execute the re-lottery effect (Y in step 138IWS928), the effect control CPU 120 changes the decorative pattern to be used and re-lottery in accordance with the change pattern indicated by the received change pattern command. A process table corresponding to the effect and the KT entry effect is selected (step 138IWS929). Then, the process proceeds to step 138IWS934.

  In the characteristic part 138IW, step 138IWS935 and variable display effect processing (step S172), which will be described later, are executed according to the process table selected in step 138IWS929, thereby performing re-lottery effect and KT plunge during decorative display variable display. The performance is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the gate passing notification (Y in step 138IWS930), the effect control CPU 120 redetermines the normal big hit symbol as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 138IWS931). In this example, as the normal jackpot pattern, the combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are arranged in even symbols is redetermined. Further, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to be used, in accordance with the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command (step 138IWS932). Then, the process proceeds to step 138IWS934.

  In addition, when it is not the big hit fluctuation (N of step 138IWS921), production control CPU120, according to the fluctuation pattern which is indicated with the fluctuation pattern command which is received, the process table which corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the decorative design which is used is created. Select (step 138IWS933). Then, the process proceeds to step 138IWS934.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 138IWS925, S929, S932, S933 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 138IWS934). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step 138IWS935). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to perform lighting / extinguishing control of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value according to the variation time in the decorative symbol variation time timer to start the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 138IWS936). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display effect effect process (step S172) (step 138IWS937).

  FIG. 8-33 to FIG. 8-35 are flowcharts showing the special figure waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 138IWS9701). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step 138IWS9706. In this characteristic portion 138IW, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 138IWS9705. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when executing the big hit mid effect. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the big hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the stage during the big hit has not yet been executed. Therefore, the processing for displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 138IWS9703 is performed. Without executing, the process proceeds to step 138IWS9706.

  If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 138IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step 138IWS9721. In this characteristic portion 138IW, when the small hitting symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step 138IWS9720. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when executing the effect during the small hit. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small-hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but since the effect during the small-hit symbol has not yet been executed, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 138IWS9703 is displayed. The process moves to step 138IWS9721 without executing the process.

  If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to stop the stop symbol of the left-middle-right decorative symbol (stopping symbol, jackpot symbol). , Small hit symbol) is confirmed and displayed (step 138IWS9703).

  When the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 138IWS9703 (Y of step 138IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 138IWS9705).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation commands (the first jackpot start designation command and the second jackpot start designation command) have been received (step 138IWS9706). When either big hit start designation command is received, production control CPU120 resets stop design indicator flag 1 (step 138IWS9707).

  Next, if the re-lottery effect is being performed in the current variable display (Y in step 138IWS9708), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display the re-lottery stock image on the image display device 5 (step 138IWS9709), The re-lottery stock flag is set (step 138IWS9710). Then, the process proceeds to step 138IWS9713.

  In this example, when the re-lottery effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern, the re-lottery stock image is displayed, and the display is performed as if the re-lottery effect is in stock. Then, after that, when a variation display that is a big hit occurs, the re-lottery effect is executed again in the big hit variation and an effect as if the re-lottery effect that was already in stock is released and executed (re-lottery release) Production) is executed.

  If the re-lottery effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 is the decoration displayed on the image display device 5 if it is determined to execute the gate passing notification (Y in step 138IWS9711). Control for replacing the combination of symbols from the normal jackpot symbol to the 2R certainty variation jackpot symbol (step 138IWS9712).

  In the feature section 138IW, after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the big hit start designation command is transmitted at the timing when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 (see step 138IWS2501A, S2505A, S2501B, S2505B), step By executing the processing of step 138IWS9712 based on the determination of Y in 138IWS9706, after the normal big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the replacement display to the 2R probability variable big hit symbol at the timing when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 Will be done.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit type of the big hit that has occurred this time is the 16R certainty variation big hit or the 2R certainty variation big hit (step 138IWS9713). Whether or not the jackpot type is the 16R certainty variation jackpot or the 2R certainty variation jackpot is determined, for example, by checking whether the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command or the display result 6 designation command. it can. If it is the 16R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit, the process directly proceeds to step 138IWS9715.

  If neither the 16R certainty variation big hit nor the 2R certainty variation big hit, it means that the second KT state ends after the end of this big hit game when the second KT state is in progress. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 clears the values of the small hit continuous number counter for counting the number of continuous small hits in the second KT state and the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter to 0 ( Step 138IWS9714).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the big hit (step 138IWS9715). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 138IWS9716), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the rendering device (the image display device 5 as the rendering component, various lamps as the rendering component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the rendering component) is executed (step 138IWS9717).

  After that, the CPU 120 for effect control updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the effect process during big hit (step S176) (step 138IWS9718).

  If the big hit symbol is not definitely displayed in the process of step 138IWS9703 (N of step 138IWS9704), if the small hit symbol is definitely displayed in the process of step 138IWS9703 (Y of step 138IWS9719), the CPU 120 for effect control is stopped. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 138IWS9720).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 138IWS9721). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 138IWS9722).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect execution flag indicating that the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is being executed is set (step 138IWS9723). If the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect execution flag is not set (if the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is not being executed), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is controlled to the second KT state ( Step 138IWS9724). Whether or not the second KT state is controlled can be determined by, for example, checking whether or not the second KT state flag is set. If it is controlled to the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed (step 138IWS9725). Whether the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed or not can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not a variation pattern command designating the first variation pattern is received.

  If the variation display of the first special symbol is not being performed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not there is a first hold memory (step 138IWS9726). Whether or not there is the first reserved memory can be determined, for example, by checking the effect control command that specifies the first reserved memory number received from the game control microcomputer 100. If there is no first pending storage, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second pending storage count is 2 or more (step 138IWS9727). Whether or not the second reserved memory number is 2 or more can be determined by, for example, checking the effect control command that specifies the second reserved memory number received from the game control microcomputer 100.

  If the number of the second reserved storage is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 120 reads all the prefetch determination result commands for the variable display of the second special symbol (step 138IWS9728).

  In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) causes the first start winning prize to the first start winning opening in the first start prize determination process (step S101A) of the first special symbol process process. When doing, whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol for the start winning is a big hit, the type of the variation pattern (variation category) is pre-read, and a pre-read determination result command indicating the result is transmitted. Further, in the present example, the game control microcomputer 100 similarly, in the second start winning determination process of the second special symbol process processing, when the start winning to the second starting winning opening occurs, that starting winning Whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit and the type of the variation pattern (variation category) is pre-reading determined, and a pre-reading determination result command indicating the determination result is transmitted.

  When the prefetch determination result command is received in the command analysis process (step S75), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received prefetch determination result command in the prefetch determination result command storage area provided in the RAM 122. In this example, since the upper limit numbers of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number are four, the prefetch determination result command storage area has four storages corresponding to the first pending storage and the second pending storage, respectively. It is assumed that the area is provided.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the read-ahead read-ahead result command indicates the big-batch read-ahead judgment result (step 138IWS9729). If there is no one that indicates the pre-reading determination result of the big hit (N of step 138IWS9729), the effect control CPU 120 determines the display color of the small hit notification that notifies the occurrence of the small hit (step 138IWS9730).

  In step 138IWS9730, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using the small hit notification display color determination table for determining the display color of the small hit notification, and determines the display color of the small hit notification. FIG. 8-36 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the small hit notification display color determination table. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-36, it is determined that the small hit notification display color is red with a probability of 90%, and the small hit notification display color is gold with a probability of 10%.

  When it is determined that the small hit notification display color is gold (Y in step 138IWS9731), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect execution flag (step 138IWS9732) and the image display device 5 At step 138IWS9733, control is performed to display the small hit notification in the gold display color.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the second KT state (N in step 138IWS9724), if the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (Y in step 138IWS9725), if there is a first hold storage (Y in step 138IWS9726), the second hold If the stored number is not two or more (N in step 138IWS9727), there is a prefetch determination result command indicating the prefetch determination result for the big hit (Y in step 138IWS9729), and the display color for the small hit notification is determined to be red (step 138IWS9731). In N), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display the small hit notification in the red display color on the image display device 5 (step 138IWS9743).

  In this example, when the big hit occurs when the second big hit occurs, for example, when the 9R certainty variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit occurs, the big hit game is controlled to the first hit state after the big hit game ends. Therefore, it is rather disadvantageous in that the second KT state will end. On the other hand, since the change in the gaming state does not occur while the big hit does not occur, the advantageous state of the second KT state continues. Therefore, in this example, when it is determined to be N in step 138IWS9729 (that is, since there is no pending that is a big hit, when it is predicted that the second KT state will continue for the current number of pending storages). By executing the processing of steps 138IWS9730 to S9733, the small hit notification is displayed in the gold display color, thereby making it possible to indicate that the second KT state continues.

  In this example, when the small hit notification is notified with the gold display color and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is started, the background image on the image display device 5 is also changed to the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect as described later. By changing to a corresponding background image (see step 138IWS9909), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

  When the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect execution flag is set (that is, when the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect is already being executed), the effect control CPU 120 displays the variation of the first special symbol. It is confirmed whether it is in the middle (step 138IWS9734). Whether the variable display of the first special symbol is being displayed or not can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not a variation pattern command designating the first variation pattern is received.

  If the variation display of the first special symbol is not being performed, the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not there is the first reserved memory (step 138IWS9735). Whether or not there is the first reserved memory can be determined, for example, by checking the effect control command that specifies the first reserved memory number received from the game control microcomputer 100. If there is no first hold storage, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of second hold storages is 2 or more (step 138IWS9736). Whether or not the second reserved memory number is 2 or more can be determined by, for example, checking the effect control command that specifies the second reserved memory number received from the game control microcomputer 100.

  If the number of second reserved storage is 2 or more, the CPU 120 for effect control reads out all the prefetch determination result commands for the variable display of the second special symbol (step 138IWS9737). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the read-ahead read-ahead result command indicates the big-batch read-ahead judgment result (step 138IWS9738). If there is no one indicating the pre-reading determination result of the big hit (N in step 138IWS9738), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to end the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect (step 138IWS9739).

  In step 138IWS9739, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect end determination table for determining whether or not to end the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, and the small hit. It is determined whether to end the RUSH continuation suggestion effect. FIG. 8-37 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect end determination table. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-37, it is determined that the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is continued with a probability of 90%, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is finished with a probability of 10%.

  If the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (Y in step 138IWS9734), or if there is the first reserved memory (Y in step 138IWS9735), if the second reserved memory number is not 2 or more (N in step 138IWS9736). ), If there is a pre-reading determination result command indicating the pre-reading determination result of the big hit (Y of step 138IWS9738), if it is determined to end the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect (Y of step 138IWS9740), the CPU 120 for effect control, In the image display device 5, control is performed to change the background image according to the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect to a normal background image (step 138IWS9741), and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is finished. Further, the effect control CPU 120 resets the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect execution flag (step 138IWS9742).

  On the other hand, when it is determined to continue the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect (N in step 138IWS9740), the effect control CPU 120 directly proceeds to step 138IWS9743.

  After that, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display the small hit notification in a red display color on the image display device 5 (step 138IWS9743).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the small hit continuous number counter (step 138IWS9744). Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the small hit continuous number display 1 indicating the continuous number of small hits in the second KT state on the image display device 5 based on the value of the updated small hit continuous number counter. If so, control is performed to update the small hit continuous number display 1 (step 138IWS9745).

  In this example, the small hit continuous number display 1 is started when a 16R sure change big hit or a 2R sure change big hit occurs in the normal state or the first KT state, and a big hit other than the 16R sure change big hit or the 2R sure change big hit occurs. The display is terminated when it occurs (that is, when the second KT state is terminated).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit continuous number counter after addition is one of the threshold values (step 138IWS9746). If the value of the small hit continuous number counter after addition is one of the thresholds, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the small hit continuous number corresponding to the value of the small hit continuous number counter after addition. The display 2 is controlled (step 138IWS9747). For example, if the value of the small hit continuous number counter after addition is 10, it means that the small hit continuous number has reached 10 times at the present small hit occurrence, and thus the threshold value “10” is reached. It is determined that the small hit continuous number has reached 10 times, and the small hit continuous number display 2 is displayed. For example, in the image display device 5, a character display such as "10COMBO" is displayed as the small hit continuous number display 2.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the small hit (step 138IWS9748). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 138IWS9749), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the rendering device (the image display device 5 as the rendering component, various lamps as the rendering component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the rendering component) is executed (step 138IWS9750).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during small hit (step S174) (step 138IWS9751).

  When the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are not displayed in the process of step 138IWS9703 (that is, when the deviant symbol is displayed) (N in step 138IWS9704, and N in step 138IWS9719), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect. The value of the process flag is updated to a value according to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 138IWS9752).

  FIG. 8-38 is a flowchart of the small hitting end effect process (step S175) in the effect control process process. In the small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 138IWS9901). The production period measurement timer is set on the basis of ending the small hit game (for example, having received the small hit end designation command) in the small hit medium effect process (step S174). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 138IWS9902).

  When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 138IWS9902), the production control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 138IWS9903), and the production device (image display device 5 according to the content of the process data n). , Various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R, etc. are executed (step 138IWS9904).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out (step 138IWS9905), and if the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 138IWS9906). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer to start the process timer (step 138IWS9907).

  If the production period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 138IWS9902), the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production execution flag is set (step 138IWS9908). If the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to change the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to a background image according to the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. (Step 138IWS9909).

  If step 138IWS9909 is executed and the background image is changed to the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, then one of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion end conditions is satisfied and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is produced. Until the end (see steps 138IWS9734 to S9742), a background image corresponding to the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is displayed over a plurality of variable displays.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 138IWS9910).

  Next, a description will be given of a production mode of the production executed in the present characteristic unit 138IW. First, the presentation mode of the re-lottery production will be described. FIG. 8-39 to FIG. 8-41 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the production mode of the re-lottery production. Note that in FIGS. 8-39 to 8-41, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C), ....

  In this example, it is assumed that the variation display of the decorative pattern that is the 2R certainty variation jackpot is executed, and that it is decided to execute the re-lottery effect when the variation starts. As shown in FIG. 8-39 (A), when the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative design is being executed, when the temporary stop timing of the decorative design comes, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (B), In the image display device 5, the combination of the decorative symbols of the normal jackpot pattern (non-probability variation jackpot symbol) (in this example, the combination of the symbols “666”) is temporarily stopped and displayed. In addition, the temporary stop display is a state in which the decorative pattern looks like it is stopped, but is not completely stopped, for example, by slightly moving the decorative pattern up and down or swinging it. Is.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (C), in the image display device 5, the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative design is restarted, and the character display 138IW001 such as “re-lottery” is displayed and re-displayed. A lottery effect is executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (D), the KT plunge effect indicating that the display screen of the image display device 5 is blacked out (dark) and shifts to the KT state (the second KT state in this example). Executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (D), even if the display screen is in the dark during the execution of the KT entry effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed on the image display device 5. Slightly visible at the upper right corner of the screen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8-40 (E), a predetermined character image 138IW002 is displayed on the image display device 5, and a character display 138IW003 such as “small hit RUSH” is displayed as a character line. Notification of transition to the 2KT state is made. In this example, the 2R probability variation big hit symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols including the special symbol "R") is reduced and displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol also in the upper right end portion of the display screen of the image display device 5. Shall be.

  Next, when the second KT state is controlled, as shown in FIG. 8-40 (F), the character display 138IW004 such as “small hit RUSH” is displayed on the image display device 5, which indicates that the second KT state is in effect. A recognizable display is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-40 (F), the character display such as “STANDBY” is displayed as the re-lottery stock image 138IW005 on the image display device 5, and the re-lottery started with the variable display in which the 2R certainty jackpot is generated. The display is performed as if the production is in stock.

  Next, it is assumed that the variation display that is a big hit is started during the second KT state. In the variable display which is the big hit, when the temporary stop timing of the decorative design comes, as shown in FIG. 8-40 (G), in the image display device 5, the combination of the decorative designs of the normal big hit design (non-probably strange big hit design) ( In this example, the combination of the symbols “666”) is temporarily displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8-40 (H), in the image display device 5, the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative design is restarted, and the re-lottery stock image 138IW005 is erased, and the “re-lottery” or the like is performed. The character display 138IW006 is displayed, and the re-lottery effect is executed. That is, the re-lottery release effect is executed in such a manner as to release the re-lottery effect that was also stocked.

  Then, when the variation time ends, as shown in FIG. 8-41 (I), the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-41 (I), a case where the 16R probability variation big hit symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols “777”) is stopped and displayed is shown based on the 16R probability variation jackpot. ing.

  Next, a presentation mode of the notification when the gate passes will be described. FIG. 8-42 is an explanatory diagram for describing a presentation mode of the notification at the time of passing through the gate. In addition, in FIG. 8-42, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C), ....

  In this example, it is assumed that the variation display of the decorative design which is the 2R probability variation big hit is executed, the gate passing notification is executed at the start of the variation, and the normal design (non-probability variation jackpot design) is re-determined as the decoration design stop symbol. I shall. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-42 (A), the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative pattern is executed, and when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 8-42 (B), in the image display device 5. , Ordinary jackpot design (non-probability variation jackpot design) combination of decorative designs (in this example, a combination of designs “666”) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, although it is determined that the 2R probability variation big hit is determined, a display is made as if the normal big hit (6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit) is also achieved.

  Next, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 after the normal jackpot design is stopped and displayed, the stop design of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5 is shown in FIG. 8-42 (C). The 2R probability variation jackpot symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols including the special symbol “R”) is replaced and displayed. That is, a display is made to notify the fact that it is a 2R probability variation big hit.

  Next, when the second KT state is controlled, as shown in FIG. 8-42 (D), the character display 138IW004 such as “small hit RUSH” is displayed on the image display device 5, indicating that the second KT state is being set. A recognizable display is provided.

  Next, an effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 8-43 and FIG. 8-44 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. In addition, in FIGS. 8-43 and 8-44, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C), ....

  When in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (A), the image display device 5 displays the small hit continuous number display 1 indicating the number of consecutive small hits in the second KT state. At the same time, the small winning continuous award ball number display 1 indicating the number of award balls generated during the period in which the small hits continuously occur in the second KT state is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that after the 16R probability variable big hit occurs and the state is shifted to the second KT state, the small hits have occurred 19 times so far, and as shown in FIG. 8-43 (A), the small hits continue. A case where a character display 138IW007 such as "19th time" is displayed as the number display 1 is shown. In addition, 15 x 10 balls x 16 rounds = 2400 prize balls are obtained during the big hit game based on the first 16R probability variation big hit, and 10 x 3 balls = 30 prize balls are obtained for each subsequent small hit. Based on the fact that 30 × 19 = 570 prize balls have been obtained by the occurrence of 19 small wins, a total of 2970 prize balls have been obtained, and FIG. As shown in, the case where a character display 138IW008 such as "2970PT" is displayed as the small winning continuous middle award number display 1 is shown.

  Then, as the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (B), the small hit pattern (combination of the symbols “135” in this example) is stopped and displayed as a stop design of the decorative pattern, and the small hit is It is assumed to have occurred. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (B), a character display 138IW009 such as "GET" is displayed, and a small hit notification is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 8-43 (B), the case where the small hit notification is displayed in a red display color is shown. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (B), the small hit continuous number display 1 is updated to “20th time” and the small hit continuous number in the second KT state is reached on the 20th time. As the small hit continuous number display 2, a character display 138IW010 such as "20COMBO" is displayed.

Next, during the small hit game, 3 game balls are won in the special winning opening, and the number of prize balls is 10 more × 3
It is assumed that the number of spheres is increased by 30 and the total is 3000. In this case, Fig. 8-43 (C)
As shown in, the number 1 of consecutive small prize balls is updated to "3000PT", and the number of prize balls generated during the period in which the small hits continuously occur in the second KT state is 3000. Based on the arrival, the character display 138IW011 such as "3000OVER" is displayed as the small hit continuous middle prize number display 2.

  Next, it is assumed that the small hit game is finished and the variable display of the next decorative design is started as shown in FIG. 8-43 (D). Then, as the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 8-44 (E), the small hitting pattern (in this example, a combination of the symbols “135”) is stopped and displayed as a stop design of the decorative design, and the small hit is It is assumed to have occurred. Here, on the basis of all read-ahead determination commands, it is determined that there is no pending storage for a big hit, processing for determining the display color of the small hit notification is executed, and the display color of the small hit notification is determined to be gold. (See steps 138IWS9728 to S9731). In this case, as shown in FIG. 8-44 (E), a character display 138IW012 such as “GET” is displayed in a gold display color as a small hit notification, and the small hit continues as part of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. To be notified.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8-44 (F), the small hit game is controlled, and when the small hit game is finished thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-44 (G), the small amount is displayed in the image display device 5. The background image is changed according to the hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. For example, a background image having a blue display color is displayed as a normal background image, whereas a background image having a rainbow display color is displayed as a background image corresponding to the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. Then, until the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 8-44 (H), the image display device 5 continues to display the background image according to the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect.

  In addition, in this example, the case where the number of prize balls in the second KT state is displayed as the small hit continuous medium prize ball number display 1 and the small hit continuous medium prize ball number display 2 is shown. I can't. For example, the number of prize balls based on winning in the special winning opening and the special winning opening in the KT state including the first KT state and the second KT state is counted, and the small winning continuous medium winning ball display 1 and the small winning continuous middle winning ball number are displayed. The display 2 may be displayed.

  As described above, according to the feature section 138IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are performed in parallel. It is executable based on the fact that the game medium (for example, the game ball) has passed through the specific area (for example, the passage gate 41) after the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed), and the advantageous state. (For example, a big hit game state) can be controlled. In addition, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small hitting game state), and it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which a game value due to the special state is more easily given than the normal state. Further, it is possible to output a specific signal (for example, jackpot signal 1), and it is possible to output the specific signal based on the predetermined condition being satisfied by the variable display of the first identification information in the normal state (for example, FIG. 22 (1), in the normal state, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 is started based on the fact that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the first special symbol), and in the normal state, by the variable display of the second identification information. No specific signal is output based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (1), in the normal state, even if the big hit symbol is derived and displayed with the second special symbol, the big hit signal 1 is output. Does not start external output). Therefore, the signal can be appropriately output when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information. In addition, even when the KT state is ended in the non-gaming state in which the player is not playing, but the pending state remains and the apparently empty state is established, the predetermined condition is satisfied (big hit). By not outputting the specific signal immediately in the derivation display of the symbol), the signal is appropriately output when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information, especially in consideration of the non-gaming state. You can

  Further, according to the characteristic part 138IW, the specific signal is a signal (for example, the big hit signal 1) capable of specifying the control to the advantageous state, and the specific signal output means variably displays the second identification information in the normal state. When a predetermined condition is satisfied by, the specific signal can be output based on the passage of the game medium through the specific region (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (1), in the normal state, the second special When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the symbol, the external output of the big hit signal 1 is started based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41). With such a configuration, it can be specified that the game machine is controlled in an advantageous state outside the gaming machine.

  Further, in particular, in the pachinko gaming machine, in response to the reception of the big hit signal, the data lamp (so-called calling lamp) performs light emitting display and liquid crystal display corresponding to the big hit, and adds 1 to the number of big hits. Therefore, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol in the non-gaming state in which the player is not playing, the data lamp remains lit and displayed even in the non-gaming state, and the vacant base However, there is a possibility that the original player may return and other players may shy away from the game, which may reduce the operating rate of the pachinko machine. There is. Therefore, in the feature section 138IW, even if the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol in the non-gaming state, the big output signal 1 is not started to be output externally, and the light emission display of the data lamp is not started. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the operating rate of such pachinko machines.

  Further, according to the feature section 138IW, it is possible to output a special signal (for example, the big hit signal 2) corresponding to the special state and the advantageous state, and it is possible to output the special signal using an output terminal different from the specific signal. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-21, the big hit signal 1 is externally output from the output terminal of the terminal number “05”, and the big hit signal 2 is externally output from the output terminal of the terminal number “06”). Moreover, the output of the special signal is started at the same timing as the output start timing of the specific signal (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22, in the normal state, like the big hit signal 1, the big hit with the first special symbol. External output of the big hit signal 2 is started based on the derivation display of the symbol, and when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed with the second special symbol, the big hit signal 2 is external based on the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41. Start output). Therefore, the special signal can be appropriately output.

  Further, according to the characteristic part 138IW, a first area (for example, a special winning opening) in which the game medium can enter in the advantageous state and a second area (for example, a special winning opening) in which the game medium can enter in the special state. With. Further, it is possible to output a special signal (for example, a special winning opening winning signal) corresponding to the entry of the game medium into the second area, and it is possible to output the special signal using an output terminal different from the specific signal ( For example, as shown in FIG. 8-21, the jackpot signal 1 is externally output from the output terminal of the terminal number “05”, and the special winning opening winning signal is externally output from the output terminal of the terminal number “07”). Therefore, it is possible to externally monitor the state of entry of the game medium into the second area.

  Further, according to the feature section 138IW, when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the first identification information, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information in the special state, the specific area is set as the game medium. It is possible to output a specific signal regardless of whether or not has passed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-22 (1) and (2), when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed in the first special symbol). When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, external output of the big hit signal 1 is started, and as shown in FIG. 8-22 (2), when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed in the second special symbol in the KT state. The external output of the big hit signal 1 is started at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to output a signal corresponding to the state during the game.

  A display means (round lamp) capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of rounds in a big hit by a signal from the main board 11 may be separately provided. In this case, the display means is turned off after the predetermined condition is satisfied (the big hit symbol is derived and displayed), and the display means is displayed in a mode corresponding to the number of rounds of the big hit in response to the game ball passing through the passage gate 41. May be configured to be performed. According to such a configuration, the player confirms the display means (round lamp) in a state where the big hit symbol of the non-probable variation symbol (even number symbol) is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol in the state where the big hit symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Even if it is difficult to recognize whether it is a non-probability variation big hit or a 2R probability variation big hit (small hit RUSH), the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, so that the image display device 5 performs a rush effect to the small hit RUSH. As a result, the small hit RUSH can be recognized, and the effect of promotion effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, as the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 while the non-probability variation design (even number design) big hit design is stopped and displayed as a stop design of the decorative design, the promotion to 16R probability variation big hit (RUSH) is notified. You may comprise. Moreover, you may comprise so that promotion notification may be performed during the big hit game after the big hit symbol of the non-probability variation symbol (even number symbol) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, according to this feature section 138IW, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state), it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small hit game state), and a game in a special state rather than a non-special state. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, the second KT state) where value is easily added. Further, as an advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state that is controlled to a non-special state after the end of the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state based on 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit) and a special state after the end of the advantageous state A second advantageous state to be controlled (for example, a big hit game state based on 16R probability variation big hit) and a third advantageous state that is controlled to a special state after the termination of the advantage state and has a lower advantage degree than the second advantage state (for example, 2R probability variation) It is possible to control to the big hit game state based on the big hit, and after notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the third advantageous state (for example, re-lottery effect and KT plunge effect). Or to notify when passing through the gate). Therefore, since it is notified that the situation is more advantageous for the player after the advantageous state ends, it is possible to improve the interest in the game in the gaming machine that can be controlled in the special state.

  In addition, according to the feature section 138IW, the re-notification effect (for example, the re-lottery effect shown in FIG. 8-39 (C)) is executed after notifying that the first advantageous state is controlled, and the re-notification effect is set. It is possible to execute a special effect (for example, the KT plunge effect shown in FIGS. 8-39 (D) and 8-40 (E)) informing that the third advantageous state is controlled after the execution is started. Therefore, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by giving a surprising effect to the effect.

  Further, according to the feature unit 138IW, when the special effect is executed after the execution of the re-notification effect is started, the specific image corresponding to the re-notification effect in the special state (for example, the re-lottery shown in FIG. 8-40 (F)). Stock image 138IW005) can be displayed. Further, it is possible to execute the re-notification effect (for example, the re-lottery effect (re-lottery release effect) shown in FIG. 8-40 (H)) after displaying the specific image. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the re-notification effect.

  In the feature section 138IW, after the re-lottery stock image is displayed, the re-lottery stock image is erased and the re-lottery release effect is executed when the next big hit occurs (the stocked re-lottery stock image is 1 However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, after shifting to the second KT state and displaying the re-lottery stock image, the re-lottery stock image is continuously displayed even if a plurality of big hits occur, and the re-lottery release effect is repeatedly executed by the plurality of big hits. (The re-lottery release effect may be executed in a loop with one re-lottery stock image).

  In addition, according to the characteristic unit 138IW, after notifying that the second advantageous state is controlled, it is not notified that the third advantageous state is controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (B)). After temporary stop display of the normal big hit symbol, the re-lottery effect and the KT plunge effect are executed as shown in FIGS. There is no case where the re-lottery effect or the KT rush effect is executed after the stop display.). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, according to the characteristic part 138IW, based on the fact that the game medium (for example, the game ball) has passed through the specific region (for example, the passage gate 41) after the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed). Can be controlled to an advantageous state. In addition, after notifying that the game medium is controlled to the first advantageous state, it is possible to notify that the game medium is controlled to the third advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium through the specific region (for example, FIG. 8-42 ( As shown in B), after the normal jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-42 (C), the 2R probability variable jackpot symbol is replaced and displayed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41). . Therefore, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by giving a surprising effect to the effect.

  Further, according to the present characteristic part 138IW, it is possible to control to a specific state (for example, a probable variation state (high probability state)) that is easily controlled to an advantageous state. Further, it is possible to control to a specific state after the end of the second advantageous state and the third advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. High probability state), and does not control to a specific state after the end of the first advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit occurs, low probability) Controlled by the state). Therefore, after the end of the third advantageous state, the advantage degree is much higher than after the end of the first advantageous state, and the player's attention degree is to be controlled to the third advantageous state rather than the first advantageous state. It is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

  In addition, according to this feature section 138IW, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state), and a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage (for example, 6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit, 16R probability variation big hit, It is possible to control to the big hit game state based on 2R probability variation big hit). In addition, it is possible to execute a re-notification effect (for example, a re-lottery effect shown in FIG. 8-39 (C)) that notifies the type of the advantageous state in a predetermined effect mode after notifying that the advantageous state is controlled. , A special effect that informs that the effect mode is different from the re-notification effect and is controlled to a specific advantageous state before the effect result after the execution of the re-notification effect is displayed (for example, FIG. 8-39 (D ) And the KT entry effect shown in FIG. 8-40 (E)) can be executed. Further, after the special effect is executed, a special image (for example, the re-lottery stock image 138IW005 shown in FIG. 8-40 (F)) suggesting the execution of the re-notification effect can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game regarding the re-notification effect.

  In addition, according to this feature section 138IW, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state), it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small hit game state), and a game in a special state rather than a non-special state. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, the second KT state) where value is easily added. Also, the control of the special state is ended in response to the control to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the 9R certainty variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit occurs during the high probability / second KT state, the second KT Exit the state, and transition to the high-probability / first KT state or the low-probability / first KT state). Further, in the special state, based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the look-ahead determination result), a suggestive effect (for example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestive effect) that suggests that the special state will continue in the later variable display is executed. It is possible. Therefore, it is suggested that the special state in which the game value is easily added is continued, and therefore, in the gaming machine that can be controlled in the special state, the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the feature section 138IW, it is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, a small hit notification) that notifies that the special state is controlled in a plurality of modes (for example, a gold display color and a red display color). And, the notification effect is executed in a special mode (for example, a gold display color) of a plurality of modes (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-44 (E), the small hit notification 138IW012 is displayed in the gold display color). Is displayed). Therefore, attention can be paid to the mode of the notification effect.

  Further, according to the feature unit 138IW, after the notification effect is executed in the special mode, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect of the mode in which the effect mode of the variable display is changed to the special mode (for example, FIG. 8-44 (G). , (H), the background image of the image display device 5 is changed to a background image according to the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the suggested effect and improve the interest in the game.

  In addition, although the case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by displaying the background image according to the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is shown in the feature part 138IW, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect may be executed by displaying a telop display that suggests continuation of the second KT state or by displaying a predetermined character image.

  Further, according to the feature unit 138IW, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect in a mode that suggests that the special state continues over a plurality of variable displays (for example, until the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is finished, a plurality of fluctuations occur. A background image corresponding to the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is displayed over the display). Therefore, the player can be given a sense of relief over a plurality of variable displays, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the feature section 138IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. . Further, as the special state, it is possible to control the state in which the variable display of the second identification information is frequently executed and the frequency of being controlled to the special state by the variable display of the second identification information is high (for example, in the second KT state, It is controlled such that a small hit is likely to occur, and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened. In addition, the suggestive effect can be executed on condition that the variable display of the first identification information is not executed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is not being displayed, the small hit notification is displayed in a gold display color. Is possible). Therefore, the unstable state accompanying the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, and the game is performed by the variable display of the first special symbol. Execution of the suggestive effect in a state in which a state change can occur can be restricted.

  Further, according to the feature unit 138IW, the pending storage controlled in the advantageous state is stored, the number of pending storages stored by the pending storage unit is decreased, and the determination process of whether to end the suggestive effect is performed. The suggestive effect is terminated based on at least one of the determination that the suggestive effect is to be ended and the storage of the variable display of the first identification information is stored (for example, in the prefetch determination result). Based on the fact that there is a big jackpot on hold, that the number of the second holding memories is not two or more, that it is decided to end the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect by the lottery process, and that the first holding memory is stored. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production is ended). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately secure the trigger for ending the suggestive effect.

  In addition, according to the feature unit 138IW, a predetermined number of times that is the number of times the special state is controlled (for example, the number of consecutive small hits in the second KT state that is counted using the number of consecutive small hits counter) is totaled, and the special number is calculated. The game value provided in the state (for example, the number of prize balls in the second KT state which is counted using the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter) is totaled. In addition, it is possible to execute a special effect according to a predetermined number of times (for example, small hit continuous number display 2 (character display 138IW010 such as "20COMBO" shown in FIG. 8-43 (B)), and a special value corresponding to the game value. It is possible to execute an effect (for example, a small hit continuous medium prize ball number display 2 (character display 138IW011 such as “3000OVER”) shown in FIG. 8-43 (C)). Therefore, by giving the player a special feeling, the interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the feature portion 138IW, when the second KT state is in progress, a small hit is generally generated unless a big hit occurs. Therefore, the small hit continuous number counter is used to detect the small hits generated in the second KT state. It is supposed to count the number of consecutive times. However, strictly speaking, there is a case where forced disengagement occurs, and therefore the number of times of intermittent small hits may be cumulatively counted across the forced disengagement. It should be noted that if a big hit does not occur during the second KT state, it may be configured to be a small hit, and the number of consecutive small hits during the second KT state may be counted. In addition, it is not always necessary to count the number of consecutive small hits during the second KT state, and even when the second KT state is set, a small percentage of deviations may cause deviations. The number of times of occurrence of may be cumulatively counted.

  Further, as described above, in the case where it is configured such that the deviation occurs at a low rate even in the second KT state (not 100% small hit), the deviation change is executed during the execution of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. In some cases, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect may be continuously executed (for example, the background image corresponding to the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect may be continuously displayed) even during the deviation.

  Further, not only the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect may be executed, but also the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect may be executed. In this case, for example, it may be configured to determine whether or not the small hit RUSH is ended based on the pre-reading determination result and execute the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect. In addition, for example, when the probability variation state is ended by executing a variation display of a predetermined number of times (probability variation number) and the small hit RUSH is also terminated when the probability variation number is reached, or the probability variation end lottery process is performed to end the probability variation state. In the case where the small hit RUSH is also ended together, the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect may be executed in advance before the end of the small hit RUSH. With such a configuration, by making it possible to execute an effect that pre-starts the end of the small hit RUSH, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the small hit RUSH actually ends or continues, and thus the player can play more games. You can improve your interest in.

  In addition, the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect may be configured to be executed in an effect mode different from the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. For example, the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect may be executed in a mode in which the background image is darkened, or a telop character display such as “RUSH end?” May be displayed.

  Further, the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect of a plurality of types of effect mode is configured to be executable, and the small hit RUSH actually ends depending on which effect mode the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect is executed. May be different. With such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode of the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect.

  Further, the configuration shown by the characteristic part 138IW may be configured to be applied to a pachinko gaming machine configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. FIG. 8-45 is an explanatory diagram for describing a case where the setting value is changeable. Of these, FIG. 8-45 (A) shows the winning probability of the big hit and the winning probability of the small hit for each set value in the non-probability change state (low probability state). Further, FIG. 8-45 (B) shows the winning probability of the big hit and the winning probability of the small hit for each set value in the probability variation state (high probability state). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-45, there is shown a case where the setting can be changed in six steps of setting values “1” to “6”. In addition, it is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, and for example, the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps or the setting can be changed in 7 steps or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 8-45 (A), in the non-probable variation state (low probability state), the setting value "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “255/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-45 (B), in the probability variation state (high-probability state), the jackpot winning probability is 10 times as large as that in the non-probability variation state (low-probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the setting value “2”, the setting value “3”, the setting value “4”, and the setting value “5”, and the setting value “6” is the highest jackpot probability “2550/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player.

  On the other hand, with regard to the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 8-45 (A) and (B), regardless of whether the setting value is “1” to “6”, the uncertain variation state (low probability The small hit probability is constant as “62986/65536” regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability change state (high probability state). Even when the big hit probability is made different according to the set value while the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. 8-45 (A) and (B), May be configured to be different for the set values "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched. In addition, in FIGS. 8-45 (A) and (B), although the small hit probability is made to match and the deviation probability is made different in the probability variation state (high-probability state) and the non-probability variation state (low-probability state), the probability variation state is different. In the (high probability state), the small hitting probability may be made lower than that in the non-probability changing state (low probability state) by the amount of increase in the big winning probability with respect to the non-probability changing state (low probability state), and the outlier probabilities may be matched. Further, even if the set values are different values of "1" and "2", for example, the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. As a result, in a gaming machine in which the number of stages that can be substantially set is less than 6, or in a gaming machine in which there is no difference in advantage due to the setting changing function, a type of gaming machine having a 6-step setting changing function and a hardware / software configuration The manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  The characteristic part 138IW discloses a configuration for solving the following problems. That is, some gaming machines are configured to be able to output a specific signal. For example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-500506 describes that a big hit signal (specific signal) is output from an external output terminal during all big hit states.

  However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-500506, whether it is in the normal state or the special state, or when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information. No consideration is given to whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display. Therefore, it is necessary to be able to output the signal appropriately when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information in the normal state.

  Therefore, in the characteristic unit 138IW, in order to solve the problem that the signal can be appropriately output when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information, the following means (1) to (5) are provided. A configuration is disclosed.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is capable of variably displaying the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). A gaming machine that can be controlled into an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit game state) and a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state), and a variable display of the first identification information. Variable display execution means capable of executing the variable display of the second identification information in parallel (for example, a portion that executes steps S110A to S113A of the first special symbol process process (step S25A) in the game control microcomputer 100, 2 Special symbol process processing (step S25B) the part which executes the same processing as steps S110A to S113A) and a predetermined condition (for example, a big hit symbol is derived) After the condition (1) is established, an advantageous state control means (for example, a game control micro) capable of controlling to an advantageous state based on the fact that the game medium (for example, a game ball) has passed through a specific area (for example, the passage gate 41). Part to execute steps S115A to S118A of the first special symbol process process (step S25A) in the computer 100, part to execute the same process as steps S115A to S118A in the second special symbol process process (step S25B), and special Special state control means that can control the state (for example, the part that executes steps S119A to S121A of the first special symbol process process (step S25A) in the game control microcomputer 100, the second special symbol process process (step S25B) Same as steps S119A to S121A And a special state control means (for example, step 138IWS2208A in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a special state (for example, a KT state) in which a game value based on a special state is more likely to be given than a normal state. Part for executing S2213A, S2214A, S2219A, S2220A, S2208B, S2213B, S2214B, S2219B, S2220B) and a specific signal output means (eg, jackpot signal microcomputer 100) capable of outputting a specific signal (eg, jackpot signal 1). (Step S23 and step 138 IWS2022A, S2022B, S2503B)), the specific signal output means, in a normal state, the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the first identification information. It is possible to output a specific signal based on the output (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (1), in the normal state, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 based on the deduction and display of the jackpot symbol with the first special symbol. Start), no specific signal is output based on the predetermined condition being satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information in the normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. Even if the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 is not started). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately output the signal when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the specific signal is a signal capable of specifying the control to the advantageous state (for example, the big hit signal 1), and the specific signal output means is predetermined by the variable display of the second identification information in the normal state. When the conditions are met, it is possible to output a specific signal based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (1), in the normal state, with the second special symbol). When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the external output of the big hit signal 1 is started based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41). With such a configuration, it can be specified that the game machine is controlled in an advantageous state outside the gaming machine.

(Means 3) Special signal output means (for example, step S23 and step in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting special signals (for example, jackpot signal 2) corresponding to the special state and the advantageous state in means 1 or 2 138IWS2022A, S2503B), and the special signal output means can output the special signal using an output terminal different from the specific signal (for example, as shown in FIG. Externally output from the output terminal of the terminal number "05", and the jackpot signal 2 is externally output from the output terminal of the terminal number "06"), and start outputting the special signal at the same timing as the output start timing of the specific signal. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-22, in the normal state, like the big hit signal 1, the first special symbol External output of the big hit signal 2 is started based on the big hit symbol being derived and displayed, and when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed with the second special symbol, the big hit signal 2 of the passing ball 41 is passed based on the passing of the game ball. External output is started). With such a configuration, the special signal can be output appropriately.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, a first area (for example, a special winning opening) in which the game medium can enter in the advantageous state and a second area in which the game medium can enter in the special state ( For example, a special winning opening) and a special signal output means (for example, in the game controlling microcomputer 100) capable of outputting a special signal (for example, a special winning opening winning signal) corresponding to the entry of the game medium into the second area. The part for executing step S23), and the special signal output means can output the special signal using an output terminal different from the specific signal (for example, as shown in FIG. The output terminal with the terminal number “05” is externally output, and the special winning opening winning signal is externally output from the output terminal with the terminal number “07”). With such a configuration, it is possible to externally monitor the state of entry of the game medium into the second area.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the specific signal output means is predetermined by the variable display of the first identification information when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and by the variable display of the second identification information in the special state. When the condition is satisfied, it is possible to output the specific signal regardless of whether or not the game medium has passed through the specific region (for example, as shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, external output of the big hit signal 1 is started at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-22 (2), in the KT state, When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed with the two special symbols, the jackpot signal 1 is externally output at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform signal output corresponding to the state during the game.

  In addition, the present characteristic unit 138IW also discloses a configuration for solving the following problems. That is, some gaming machines are configured to further inform after being informed that the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state. For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-104227 describes that the effect symbols are once in the temporary stop display state with the even number symbols or the number symbols other than "7", and then the re-lottery effect is executed. .

  However, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-104227, when the game machine is applied to a special state that can be easily controlled to a special state and a game value is easily added, it is interesting to inform the player that it is controlled to an advantageous state. Cannot be improved sufficiently.

  Therefore, in the characteristic unit 138IW, the following means (1) to (6) are configured in order to solve the problem that it is possible to improve the interest in the game in the gaming machine that can be controlled in the special state. It is disclosed.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is capable of playing a game, and is in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit game state) and a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state). ) And is a controllable gaming machine, and executes advantageous steps state control means that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, steps S115A to S118A of the first special symbol process process (step S25A) in the gaming control microcomputer 100). Part, the second special symbol process process (step S25B) to execute the same processing as steps S115A to S118A), and special state control means capable of controlling to a special state (for example, the first in the game control microcomputer 100) Execute steps S119A to S121A of special symbol process processing (step S25A) Minute, the second special symbol process process (step S25B) part to execute the same process as steps S119A to S121A), and a special state in which a game value is more likely to be imparted by the special state than the non-special state (for example, the second KT state) ) Controllable special state control means (for example, the portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 138IWS2208A, S2208B), the advantageous state control means, as an advantageous state, at least after the end of the advantageous state A first advantageous state controlled to a special state (for example, a big hit game state based on 6R normal big hit or a 2R normal big hit) and a second advantageous state controlled to a special state after the end of the advantageous state (for example, 16R probability variation big hit) The original big hit game state) and the special state is controlled after the end of the advantageous state It is possible to control to a third advantageous state having a lower degree of advantage than the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state based on 2R certainty variation big hit), and after being informed that the advantageous state is controlled, the third advantageous state is controlled. And a notification unit (for example, a portion that executes step 138IWS935 and step S172 according to the process table selected in step 138IWS929 in the effect control CPU 120, or executes step 138IWS9712). To do. According to such a configuration, since it is notified that the situation is more advantageous for the player after the advantageous state ends, it is possible to improve the interest in the game in the gaming machine that can be controlled in the special state.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the notifying means performs re-notification effect (for example, re-lottery effect shown in FIG. 8-39 (C)) after notifying that the first advantageous state is controlled, and re-notification. As it is possible to execute a special effect (for example, the KT plunge effect shown in FIGS. 8-39 (D) and 8-40 (E)) that informs that the third advantageous state is controlled after the execution of the effect is started. It may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a surprising effect to the production and improve the interest in the game.

(Means 3) When the special effect is executed in the means 2 after the start of the re-notification effect, the specific image corresponding to the re-notification effect in the special state (for example, the re-lottery stock image shown in FIG. 8-40 (F)) 138IW005) can be displayed on a specific image display means (for example, a portion of the CPU 120 for effect control that executes step 138IWS9709) and a re-notification effect (for example, re-lottery shown in FIG. 8-40 (H) after displaying the specific image. Re-notification production re-execution means capable of executing production (re-lottery release production) (for example, a portion that executes step 138IWS935 and step S172 according to the process table selected in step 138IWS925 in production control CPU 120) It may have been done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in re-notification production.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the notifying means does not notify that the third advantageous state is controlled after notifying that the second advantageous state is controlled (for example, in FIG. As shown in 8-39 (B), after the normal big hit symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 8-39 (C) to 8-40 (E), re-lottery effect and KT plunge effect are executed. That is, there is no case where the re-lottery effect or the KT plunge effect is executed after the 16R probability variation big hit symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the advantageous state control means, after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, derivation display of the big hit symbol), a specific area (for example, the passage gate 41) is set as a game medium. (For example, a game ball) can be controlled to an advantageous state on the basis of passing, and the informing means informs that the first advantageous state is controlled, and then on the basis that the game medium has passed through the specific region. It is possible to inform that it is controlled to the third advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-42 (B), after the normal big hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-42 (C). , The 2R certainty variation big hit symbol is replaced and displayed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a surprising effect to the production and improve the interest in the game.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, a specific state control means (for example, a game control micro) capable of controlling to a specific state (for example, a probability variation state (high probability state)) that is easily controlled to an advantageous state. A portion of the computer 100 that executes steps 138IWS2207A, S2212A, S2207B, S2212B), and the specific state control means is controllable to a specific state after the end of the second advantageous state and the third advantageous state (for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 20, when the 16R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit occurs, the probability variation state (high probability state) is controlled) and the specific state is not controlled after the end of the first advantageous state (for example, FIG. 8). As shown in -20, in the case of 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit, it is controlled to a low probability state) It may be. According to such a configuration, the third advantageous state is controlled to be the third advantageous state rather than the first advantageous state since the advantage degree is higher after the third advantageous state than after the first advantageous state. The degree of attention of the player can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, the present characteristic unit 138IW also discloses a configuration for solving the following problems. That is, some gaming machines are configured to further inform after being informed that the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state. For example, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-104227, after the production symbols are in the temporary stop display state with the even number symbols or the number symbols other than “7”, the re-lottery effect (re-notification effect) is executed. Is listed.

  However, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-104227, it is not possible to sufficiently improve the interest in the game regarding the re-notification effect.

  Therefore, the present characteristic unit 138IW discloses the configurations of the following means (1) to (6) in order to solve the problem that it is possible to improve the interest in the game regarding the re-notification effect.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can play a game and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and can be controlled in an advantageous state. Advantageous state control means (for example, the part that executes steps S115A to S118A of the first special symbol process process (step S25A) in the game control microcomputer 100, steps S115A to S118A in the second special symbol process process (step S25B)) Advantageous state control means is provided with a portion for performing similar processing), and the advantageous state control means provides a plurality of types of advantageous states having different degrees of advantage (for example, 6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit, 16R certainty variation big hit, and 2R certainty variation big hit based jackpot gaming state). ), And a predetermined effect mode after notifying that it is controlled to an advantageous state. A re-notification effect execution means (for example, the process selected in step 138IWS929 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a re-notification effect (for example, a re-lottery effect shown in FIG. 8-39 (C)) that notifies the type of a more advantageous state. Before executing the re-notification effect, the effect mode is different from the re-notification effect and is controlled to a specific advantageous state before the step 138IWS935 and step S172 are executed according to the table) and the effect result after the execution of the re-notification effect is displayed. Special effect execution means (for example, the process selected in step 138IWS929 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the special effect to be notified (for example, the KT entry effect shown in FIGS. 8-39 (D) and 8-40 (E)). A unit that executes step 138IWS935 and step S172 according to the table ) And a special image display means (for example, effect control) capable of displaying a special image (for example, re-lottery stock image 138IW005 shown in FIG. 8-40 (F)) indicating execution of re-notification effect after execution of special effect. (For executing step 138IWS9709 in the CPU 120 for use)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game regarding the re-notification effect.

(Means 2) In the means 1, a special state control means (eg, the first special symbol in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state advantageous to the player different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state) The part that executes steps S119A to S121A of the process process (step S25A), the part that executes the same process as steps S119A to S121A in the second special symbol process process (step S25B), and the special state rather than the non-special state An advantageous state control means is provided with a special state control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 138IWS2208A and S2208B) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which a game value is easily given. Is, as an advantageous state, at least A first advantageous state controlled to a non-special state after the end of the profitable state (for example, a big hit game state based on 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit), and a second advantageous state controlled to the special state after the end of the advantageous state ( For example, a big hit game state based on 16R probability variation big hit), and a third advantage state that is controlled to a special state after the end of the advantage state and has a lower degree of advantage than the second advantage state (for example, big hit game state based on 2R probability variation big hit) The re-notification effect executing means can execute the re-notification effect after notifying that the re-notification effect is controlled to the first advantageous state, and the special effect execution means makes the third notification after the start of the re-notification effect. It is configured to be able to execute a special effect (for example, the KT entry effect shown in FIGS. 8-39 (D) and 8-40 (E)) notifying that the control is performed in the advantageous state. Good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a surprising effect to the production and improve the interest in the game.

(Means 3) In the means 2, re-notification effect re-execution means (re-notification effect re-execution means) capable of executing re-notification effect (for example, re-lottery effect (re-lottery release effect) shown in FIG. 8-40 (H)) after displaying the specific image. For example, the CPU 120 for effect control may be configured to include (a part that executes step 138IWS935 and step S172) according to the process table selected in step 138IWS925. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in re-notification production.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 2 to the means 3, after notifying that the second advantageous state is controlled, it is not notified that the third advantageous state is controlled (for example, FIG. As shown in B), after the normal big hit symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the re-lottery effect and the KT plunge effect are executed as shown in FIGS. There is no case where the re-lottery effect or the KT rush effect is executed after the 16R probability variation big hit symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 2 to 4, the advantageous state control means, after the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, derivation display of the big hit symbol), the specific area (for example, the passage gate 41) is set in the game medium. (For example, a game ball) can be controlled to an advantageous state based on passing, and after the notification that the first advantageous state is controlled, the third advantage based on the fact that the game medium has passed the specific area. It is possible to inform that the state is controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-42 (B), after the normal big hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-42 (C), the passage gate 41 is played. It is configured to include a notification means (for example, a portion for executing step 138IWS9712 in the effect control CPU 120) that replaces and displays the 2R probability variation big hit symbol based on the passage of the ball. It may be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a surprising effect to the production and improve the interest in the game.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, a specific state control means (for example, a game control micro) capable of controlling to a specific state (for example, a probability variation state (high probability state)) that is easily controlled to an advantageous state. A portion of the computer 100 that executes steps 138IWS2207A, S2212A, S2207B, S2212B), and the specific state control means is controllable to a specific state after the end of the second advantageous state and the third advantageous state (for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 20, when the 16R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit occurs, the probability variation state (high probability state) is controlled) and the specific state is not controlled after the end of the first advantageous state (for example, FIG. 8). As shown in -20, in the case of 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit, it is controlled to a low probability state) It may be. According to such a configuration, the third advantageous state is controlled to be the third advantageous state rather than the first advantageous state since the advantage degree is higher after the third advantageous state than after the first advantageous state. The degree of attention of the player can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, the present characteristic unit 138IW also discloses a configuration for solving the following problems. That is, in the gaming machine, it is possible to control to a special state which is different from the advantageous state and which is advantageous to the player, and which can be controlled to a special state in which the frequency of control to the special state is increased compared to the non-special state. There is. For example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-156952 describes that even in a small hitting game state (special state), it is an opening mode in which the player can obtain a payout, although it is less than in the big hitting game state. ing. Further, it is described that the control is performed in a state (a special state) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state.

  However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-156952, the gaming property regarding the special state is monotonous, and the interest in the game cannot be sufficiently improved.

  Therefore, in the characteristic unit 138IW, the following means (1) to (7) are configured to solve the problem of being able to improve the interest in the game in the gaming machine that can be controlled to the special state. It is disclosed.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention can perform variable display, and an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) and a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game) State) is a game machine that can be controlled, and advantageous state control means that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, steps S115A to S118A of the first special symbol process process (step S25A) in the game control microcomputer 100) are executed. Part to perform, the second special symbol process process (step S25B) to execute a process similar to steps S115A to S118A), and special state control means capable of controlling to a special state (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100) 1 Steps S119A to S121A of special symbol process processing (step S25A) are executed Part, a part that executes the same processing as steps S119A to S121A in the second special symbol process process (step S25B)), and a special state in which a game value is more likely to be imparted by the special state than the non-special state (for example, the second KT State) controllable special state control means (for example, the portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 138IWS2208A and S2208B), and determination means for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state (for example, for game control) Before executing the step 138IWS58A, S58B in the microcomputer 100, and determining the determining means, determining means for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (for example, the first special symbol in the game controlling microcomputer 100). Of process processing (step S25A) A portion for executing step S101A, a portion for executing the same processing as step S101A in the second special symbol process processing (step S25B)), and the special state control means is in a special state corresponding to the control to the advantageous state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the 9R probability variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit occurs in the high probability / second KT state, the second KT state is ended and the high probability / first KT state or low probability is reached. Probability / transition to the first KT state), in the special state, based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the look-ahead determination result), a suggestive effect that suggests that the special state will continue in the subsequent variable display (for example, small Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing hit RUSH continuous suggestion effect (for example, execute steps 138IWS9733, S9909 in the CPU 120 for effect control) Part) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is suggested that the special state in which the game value is easily imparted is continued, and therefore, in the gaming machine that can be controlled to the special state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the suggestion effect executing means has a plurality of types of notification effects (for example, a small hit notification) for notifying that the special state is controlled (for example, a gold display color and a red display color). ) Is performed, and the suggestive effect is executed by executing the notification effect in a special mode (for example, a gold display color) out of a plurality of types of modes (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-44 (E)). In addition, the small hit notification 138IW012 is displayed in a gold display color). According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on the mode of the notification effect.

(Means 3) In the means 2, the suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect in a mode of changing the effect mode of the variable display to the special mode after executing the notification effect in the special mode (for example, FIG. 44 (G) and (H), the background image of the image display device 5 may be changed to a background image according to the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the suggestive effect and improve the interest in the game.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect in a mode that suggests that the special state continues over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a small hit). The background image corresponding to the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect may be displayed over a plurality of variable displays until the RUSH continuation suggesting effect is finished. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of relief over a plurality of variable displays, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, variably display the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). It is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information which can be executed in parallel (for example, a first special symbol in the game control microcomputer 100). A part that executes steps S110A to S113A of the process process (step S25A), a part that executes the same process as steps S110A to S113A in the second special symbol process process (step S25B)), and the special state control means is special. As the state, the variable display of the second identification information is frequently executed, and the variable display of the second identification information is frequently controlled to a special state. It is controllable (for example, in the second KT state, it is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and is controlled to a low base state to shorten the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B). The effect execution means can execute the suggested effect on condition that the variable display of the first identification information is not executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120, when determining N in step 138IWS9725, steps 138IWS9728 to S9733). By executing the above, it is possible to display the small hit notification in the display color of gold when the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner). According to such a configuration, it is possible to limit the execution of the suggestive effect in an unstable state due to the variable display of the first identification information.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, a holding storage means (for example, a first holding storage buffer, a second holding storage buffer) for storing information regarding variable display as a holding storage is provided, and suggestive effect execution is performed. The means is determined to end the suggestive effect by memorizing the holdable memory controlled in the advantageous state, reducing the number of holdable memories stored by the holdable memory means, and determining whether or not to end the suggestive effect. Based on at least one of the fact that the pending storage related to the variable display of the first identification information is stored (for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets Y in step 138IWS9735). When it is determined, when it is determined as N in step 138IWS9736, when it is determined as Y in step 138IWS9738, When it is determined that the N in the fine step 138IWS9736, when it is determined that Y in step 138IWS9740, step 138IWS9741, running S9742 to end the Koatari RUSH continue suggesting directed by) it may be configured so. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately secure the trigger for ending the suggestive effect.

(Means 7) A predetermined number of times, which is the number of times the special state is controlled by any one of the means 1 to 6 (for example, the number of consecutive small hits in the second KT state which is counted using the number of consecutive small hits counter). While totaling the game value (for example, the number of prize balls in the second KT state that is counted using the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter) added in the special state (for example, the effect control CPU 120). Steps 138IWS615, S620 and step 138IWS9744) and a special effect according to a predetermined number of times (for example, small hit continuous number display 2 (character display 138IW010 such as "20COMBO" shown in FIG. 8-43 (B)). ) Can be executed by special effect executing means (for example, step 138IWS974 in the CPU 120 for effect control). And a special effect corresponding to the game value (for example, small winning continuous medium prize ball number display 2 (character display 138IW011 such as “3000OVER” shown in FIG. 8-43 (C)) can be executed. It may be configured to include a special effect executing unit (for example, a part of the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps 138IWS618 and S623). With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by giving the player a special feeling.

(Explanation regarding the association of the characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic unit 138IW may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic unit. The feature parts combined in this way or the individual feature parts that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations related to the other feature parts.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 71AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 71AK that can be included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The characteristic part 71AK is a modification of the characteristic part 138IW, and the configuration other than the following description conforms to the characteristic part 138IW and the basic description. Below, it demonstrates centering on the part peculiar to the characteristic part 71AK. Note that some of the following features may be applied to the feature unit 138IW. In addition, the effect described below is executed by the display control unit 123 according to an instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

(Display result and determination rate)
FIG. 9A shows an example of determination (determination rate) of the display result (variable display result) of the special figure game in the characteristic portion 71AK. The determination of the display result of the special figure game (the first special symbol variation process (step S112A), the second special symbol variation process) is a random number value and a table (decision value to be compared with the random number value in each display result (decision result)) (The table to which is assigned) and a lottery is performed (the same applies to other decisions). The decision example (decision rate) in FIG. 9A is realized by adjusting the range of decision values in the table (the decision rates in other decisions are the same).

  FIG. 9-1 (A) shows an example of determining the display result of the first special figure game. As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), "big hit" and "miss" are prepared as the display result of the first special figure game (there is no "small hit"). The determination rate of the display result is different when the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability state) and when the gaming state is the non-determination variation state (low probability state) that is not the probability variation state (the different table between the former and the latter). Should be prepared). Specifically, the probability of "big hit" is higher in the probability variation state than in the non-probability variation state, and the proportion of "miss" is lower by that amount (that is, when the probability variation state is "big hit". It is easy to become).

FIG. 9-1 (B) shows an example of determining the display result of the second special figure game. As shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), "big hit", "small hit", and "miss" are prepared as the display results of the second special figure game. The determination rate of the display result is different when the game state is the probability variation state (high probability state) and when the game state is the non-probability variation state (low probability state) that is not the probability variation state (the different table between the former and the latter). Should be prepared). Specifically, the probability of "big hit" is higher in the probability variation state than in the non-probability variation state, and the rate of "miss" is lower by that amount (that is, when the probability variation state is "big hit". It is easy to become). The determination rate of "small hit" is
It is the same in the non-probability-changed state and the probability-changed state. The display result of the second special figure game is likely to be "small hit". Further, in the probability variation state, the second special figure game does not become "miss".

(Type of jackpot)
As shown in FIG. 9-2, "5R probability variation A", "5R probability variation B", "5R probability variation C", "5R normal A", and "5R normal B" are prepared as jackpot types in the characteristic portion 71AK. ing.

  Each jackpot type is common in that the round game is executed five times (5R) in the subsequent jackpot gaming state. In the big hit game state after the "big hit" of "5R probability variation A" and "5R normal A", the maximum open period of the special winning opening (formed by the special variable winning ball device 7) in one round game is 10 It is set to seconds (long open), and in the jackpot gaming state after the "big hit" of "5R certainty variation B", "5R certainty variation C", and "5R regular B", the big winning opening in one round game The opening upper limit period is set to 6 seconds (middle opening). In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened once. The open upper limit period of the open is 1.5 seconds (short open).

  The gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state after the “big hit” of “5R certainty variation A” and “5R certainty variation B” is a high probability / low base state. The gaming state after the jackpot gaming state after the "big hit" of "5R probability variation C" is a high probability / high base state. The gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state after the "big hit" of "5R normal A" and "5R normal B" is a low probability / high base state. Details of each game state will be described later.

  The determination rate of the jackpot type differs between the first special figure game and the second special figure game. The “5R probability variation C” is more easily determined (selected) in the first special figure game than in the second special figure game. "5R probability variation A" and "5R probability variation B" are more easily determined in the first special figure game than in the second special figure game. Specifically, the determination ratio of each of “5R probability variation A” and “5R probability variation B” is higher in the second special figure game. The determination rate of either "5R Probability Change A" or "5R Probability Change B" is lower in the second special figure game, but the total value of the respective determination rates of "5R Probability Change A" and "5R Probability Change B" is The 2 special map game may be higher.

(Display result)
As for the display result of the special figure game in the characteristic part 71AK, "small hit" is "1", "big hit" of "5R certainty variation A" is "7", and "big hit" of "5R certainty variation B" is "5" , "5R probability variation C""bighit" is "4", "5R normal A""bighit" is "6", "5R normal B""bighit" is "8", Is "-".

  The display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (fixed decorative pattern) shows that “small hit” is “153” (from left to right, the decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative pattern display area 5R. The same shall apply hereafter), "big hit" of "5R certainty variation A" is "777", "big hit" of "5R certainty variation B" is "555", and "big hit" of "5R certainty variation C" is " 444 ”, the“ big hit ”of“ 5R normal A ”is“ 666 ”, the“ big hit ”of“ 5R normal B ”is“ 888 ”, and the“ miss ”is any other than the above (three symbols are It is not the same, and it is different from the above "small hit". A combination of reach loss and non-reach loss is prepared).

(Game state)
In the characteristic portion 71AK, the variation time of the second special figure game in the normal state (low probability state and low base state) is set to be extremely long. The specific variation time is arbitrary, but is, for example, “miss”, “small hit”, “big hit”, and a long variation time of 30 minutes (especially, the variation time of the first special figure game ( For example, it is set to a time longer than the longest fluctuation time or average fluctuation time). On the other hand, in the high-probability state or the high-base state (specifically, in the high-probability / low-base state, high-probability / high-base state, low-probability / high-base state), the fluctuation time is set to be short. (For example, 2 seconds for non-reach miss, small hit, 15 seconds for reach miss and big hit (if multiple reach effects are provided, multiple variation times are set according to the type of reach), etc. In particular, the first special figure It is set shorter than the variation time of the game (for example, the shortest variation time or average variation time).

  The variation time of the first special figure game is, for example, 16 seconds at the time of non-reach loss, 30 seconds at the time of reach loss and a big hit (when a plurality of reach effects are provided, a plurality of variation times are provided according to the type of reach. ) Etc. (may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or may be changed to some extent depending on the gaming state).

  With the gaming state as described above, in the high probability state or the high base state, the second special figure game can be executed with high frequency. Here, in the second special figure game, a "small hit" occurs with high probability (variable display derived display). Therefore, in the high-probability state or the high-base state, that is, in the high-probability / low-base state, the high-probability / high-base state, and the low-probability / high-base state, the small hit frequently occurs.

  The low base state and the high base state are the same as the low base state and the high base state of the characteristic portion 138IW, respectively. Thus, the high probability / low base state of feature 71AK corresponds to the second KT state of feature 183IW. In other words, in the high-probability / low-base state, "small hit" frequently occurs due to the high-probability state, and the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened due to the low-base state, so that the special winning opening is achieved in the small-hit gaming state. It is easy to get a prize and many award balls are easily obtained. The high probability / high base state and the low probability / high base state of the feature 71AK correspond to the first KT state of the feature 183IW. In other words, in these states, "small hits" occur frequently due to the high probability state and the high base state, but due to the long open time of the variable winning ball device 6B due to the high base state, the special winning opening is achieved in the small hit game state. There is almost no prize, and there is almost no prize ball). In the characteristic portion 81AK, from the above, the high-probability / low-base state is the most advantageous game state in which there is a possibility that the most prize balls can be obtained.

  The high-probability / low-base state ends with the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state (control to the jackpot gaming state) based on the "big hit" of "5R probability variation C", "5R regular A", or "5R regular B". After the jackpot gaming state, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state or a low probability / high base state). In the high-probability / low-base state, if a "big hit" of "5R probability variation A" or "5R probability variation B" occurs, it will return to the normal state once in the subsequent big-hit gaming state, but then again with high probability / low base. Controlled by the state. In such a case, the high probability / low base state will continue.

  The low probability / high base state is the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state based on the “big hit” of “5R probability variation A”, “5R probability variation B”, or “5R probability variation C” (in this case, high probability / low base state or High probability / shift to high base state) or execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) (in this case, the high base state ends and the game state returns to the normal state) When the end condition is satisfied, the process ends. In the low probability / high base state, when the “big hit” of “5R normal A” or “5R normal B” occurs, the low probability / high base state continues (low probability / high again after the big hit game state ends. Controlled to the base state).

  The high probability / high base state is the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state based on the “big hit” of “5R probability variation A”, “5R probability variation B”, “5R normal A”, or “5R regular B” (in this case, high Probability / Low Base State or Low Probability / High Base State). In the high probability / high base state, when the “big hit” of “5R probability variation C” occurs, the high probability / high base state continues (after the big hit game state ends, it is controlled to the high probability / high base state again. ).

(About playability)
As described above, in the high-probability / low-base state, many award balls are obtained, which is most advantageous, but the high-probability / low-base state of the jackpot type (“5R probability variation A” or “5R probability variation B”) The decision rate is higher in the second special figure game. Therefore, the player wants to execute the second special figure game. However, in the normal state (also referred to as a non-KT state), the variation time of the second special figure game is long, and the execution of the second special figure game does not proceed. Therefore, the player has a "big hit" in the first special figure game. Left-handed to aim at. On the other hand, in the KT state (high probability / low base state (second KT state), high probability / high base state (first KT state), low probability / high base state (first KT state)), the second special game The right changing is performed because the variation time of is shortened and the execution frequency of the second special figure game is improved. In the high-probability / high-base state (first KT state) and the low-probability / high-base state (first KT state), the second special figure game is executed, and “5R certainty variation A” and “5R certainty variation B” Aim for a "big hit". The high-probability / low-base state (second KT state) may end when the "big hit" occurs, so it is better not to have the "big hit" occur in that state. Even in the case of “”, if the jackpot type is “5R probability variation A” or “5R probability variation B”, the state is continued.

(Characteristic production with the characteristic part 71AK)
In the characteristic portion 71AK, in the high-probability / low-base state, a series of effects are executed over a plurality of times of the second special figure game, the small hit game state, and the big hit game state. For example, the production control CPU 120 ends the jackpot gaming state based on the "big hit" of "5R probability variation A" and "5R probability variation B" (the jackpot type is at various timings (for example, when the jackpot game state starts or ends). The display control unit 123 is instructed to execute the series of effects. The display control unit 123 receives the instruction and executes the series of effects. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to display the series of effects at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the “big hit” of “5R probability variation C”, “5R normal A”, and “5R normal B”, for example. Instructs the end of execution. Upon receiving the instruction, the display control unit 123 ends the series of effects.

  In the characteristic portion 71AK, as a series of effects, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the ally character 71AK001 advances along the road 71AK002 (By scrolling the road 71AK002 from right to left on the screen, the ally character 71AK001 The production is executed (the image looks like traveling rightward on the road 71AK002) (each image is displayed on the image display device 5). The effect may be executed, for example, by looping the moving image.

  In the series of effects, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the upper left corner in a smaller size than in the normal state, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size and variably displayed. . Further, in the lower part of the screen, an icon display area 71AK003 for displaying an icon (icon C in FIG. 9-3) indicating the opening of the special winning opening or the special winning opening is provided. Details of the icon will be described later. Further, in the lower right corner of the screen, a digestion count image 71AK004 showing the digestion count (the number erased by displaying) of the icons A to C in one high probability / low base state is displayed. The number of high-probability / low-base states is counted as “1” even when the high-probability / low-base state continues with a “big hit” of “5R certainty variation A” and “5R certainty variation B”. For example, the mode of “high probability / low base state → big hit game state of“ big hit ”of“ 5R probability variation A ”→ high probability / low base state” is also one high probability / low base state.

  In the series of effects, an enemy character may appear along with the execution of the variable display, and a battle effect of fighting the ally character 71AK001 may be executed (the effect control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to display in accordance with the variation pattern, etc.). Instruct execution). Specifically, the ally character AK001 traveling on the road 71AK002 encounters an enemy character at the start of the variable display, fights until the end of the variable display, and is notified of the outcome of the battle (battle) at the end of the variable display. The outcome of the battle depends on the variable display result. Specifically, in the case of "small hit", "5R certainty variation A" or "5R certainty variation B" "big hit", the battle is won (because the high probability / low base state advantageous to the player continues), In the case of a "big hit" of "5R Probable C", "5R Normal A" or "5R Normal B", the battle is lost (because the high probability / low base state ends).

  As the enemy character, a non-boss character (small fish character) 71AK005 as shown in FIG. 9-4 and a boss character 71AK005 as shown in FIG. 9-5 are prepared. The battle production in which the non-boss character 71AK005 appears is the first battle production. The battle effect in which the boss character 71AK005 appears is the second battle effect. Which enemy character appears (that is, the mode of the battle effect, etc.) is determined by the variation pattern.

  As the fluctuation patterns used in the high probability / low base state, fluctuation patterns PC1-1 and PC1-2 are prepared as shown in FIG. 9-6. The fluctuation pattern PC1-1 specifies 2 seconds as the special figure fluctuation time, and specifies execution of the first battle effect. The execution period of the first battle effect is 2 seconds in accordance with the special map variation time. The fluctuation pattern PC1-2 specifies 15 seconds as the special figure fluctuation time, and specifies execution of the second battle effect. The execution period of the second battle effect is 15 seconds in accordance with the special map variation time. The fluctuation patterns PC1-1 and PC1-2 are commonly used for "big hit" and "small hit". In the high-probability / low-base state, there is no "miss", so the variation pattern in the high-probability / low-base state is either PC1-1 or PC1-2. The determination rate of the variation pattern is constant regardless of the variable display result, and is 1/2 for PC1-1 and PC1-2.

  The first battle effect executed when the second special figure game of the variation pattern PC1-1 is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 9-4. When the second special figure game is started in the high-probability / low-base state, the variable display of the decorative design is also started in synchronization with this (FIG. 9-4 (A)). At the time of this start, the non-boss character 71AK005 appears (FIG. 9-4 (A)), and the first battle effect starts. Since the execution period of the first battle effect is 2 seconds, the battle between the two ends immediately.

  If the variable display result is "5R probability variation A" or "5R probability variation B", "big hit", the fixed decoration pattern ("5R probability variation A") corresponding to "5R probability variation A" or "5R probability variation B" due to the end of variable display In the case of, “777”, and in the case of “5R probability variation B”, “555”.) Is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 9-4 (B). In FIG. 9-4 (B), “5R probability variation B”). The fixed decorative pattern of is stopped and displayed.) When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, after the animation in which the ally character 71AK001 defeats the non-boss character 71AK005, the character (“WIN!”) For notifying the victory of the ally character 71AK001, and the subsequent high jackpot game state is also high. Probability / Low base character (second KT state) to inform that it continues ("small hit RUSH continuation!". Like the characteristic part 138IW, the second KT state also includes "small hit RUSH" in terms of performance). The notification image 71AK005 is displayed (FIG. 9-4 (B)).

  Then, at this time, the icon A or B corresponding to the jackpot type is additionally displayed in the icon display area 71AK003 (see FIG. 9-4 (B). In FIG. 9-4 (B), the icon B is added). .. Icon A indicates that the special winning opening is to be opened once for a long time (opened with "5R probability variation A"). Icon B indicates that the special winning opening is once opened in the middle (opened in "5R probability change B"). Since "5R probability variation A" and "5R probability variation B" open the special winning opening five times by a round game of five rounds, five icons A or B are additionally displayed in the icon display area 71AK003. In the case of "5R probability variation A", five icons A are added, and in the case of "5R probability variation B", five icons B are added. The five icons A or B are erased one by one each time the special winning opening is opened (every time the opening is started).

  When the variable display result is "small hit", the fixed decorative pattern ("153") of "small hit" is stopped and displayed by the end of the variable display (see FIG. 9-4 (C)). When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the ally character 71AK001 defeats the non-boss character 71AK005. The notification image 71AK006 including the characters (“WIN !!”) for notifying the victory of the character 71AK001 is displayed (FIG. 9-4 (C)).

  Then, at this time, of the variable display of this time and the variable display that has been held, the variable display in which the display result is “Small hit” and the corresponding icon C is not displayed (identified by pre-reading etc. as described later). Yes) are additionally displayed in the icon display area 71AK003 (see FIG. 9-4 (C)). The icon C indicates that the special winning opening is short-opened once (opened by "small hit"). Here, since the special winning opening is opened once for each small hit game state, the variable display of the small hit game state or "small hit" and the icon C correspond one to one. The icon C is erased one by one each time the special winning opening is opened (every time the opening is started).

  If the variable display result is "5R probability change C", "5R normal A", or "5R normal B" "big hit", the variable display ends, and thus the fixed decorative pattern ("5R probability change C" , "444", "5R normal A", "666", and "5R normal B", "888".) (See FIG. 9-4 (D)). In FIG. 9-4 (D), the fixed decorative design of "5R normal A" is stopped and displayed). When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, after the animation in which the ally character 71AK001 loses to the non-boss character 71AK005, a character (“Loss ...”) indicating the defeat of the ally character 71AK001 and a high probability / low base state ( A notification image 71AK007 including characters (“Small hit RUSH end ...”) for notifying that the second KT state) will end is displayed (FIG. 9-4 (D)).

  As will be described later in detail, when the variable display for deriving the “big hit” of “5R probability variation C”, “5R normal A”, or “5R normal B” is withheld, additional display of icons is performed thereafter. Limited. As for this limitation, here, the execution of the battle effect before the variable display that derives the "big hit" of "5R probability variation C", "5R normal A", or "5R normal B" is limited, and execution of the variable display is performed. It is realized by not adding an icon even in the case of losing battle performances that are sometimes executed (details will be described later). From the above, no icon is displayed in the icon display area 71AK003 when the “5R probability variation C”, “5R normal A”, or “5R normal B” big hit type is “big hit” (FIG. 9-4 (D)). ) (The same applies in the second battle production).

  Next, the second battle effect will be described with reference to FIG. 9-5. When the second special figure game is started in the high-probability / low-base state, the variable display of the decorative pattern is also started in synchronization with this (FIG. 9-5 (A)). At the time of this start, the boss character 71AK008 appears (FIG. 9-5 (A)), and the second battle effect starts. Since the execution period of the second battle production is 15 seconds, the battle between the two ends after being continued for a while.

  When the variable display result is "5R probability variation A" or "5R probability variation B", "big hit", as in the first battle effect, the fixed decoration corresponding to "5R probability variation A" or "5R probability variation B" is set by the end of the variable display. The design is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 9-5 (B). In FIG. 9-5 (B), the fixed decorative design of “5R probability variation A” is stopped and displayed). When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, after the animation in which the ally character 71AK001 defeats the boss character 71AK008, the notification image 71AK005 is displayed as in the first battle effect (FIG. 9-5 (B)). Then, at this time, five icons A or B corresponding to the jackpot type are additionally displayed in the icon display area 71AK003 (see FIG. 9-5 (B). In FIG. 9-5 (B), the icon A is added. Exist).

  When the variable display result is "small hit", the fixed decorative pattern ("153") of "small hit" is stopped and displayed due to the end of the variable display (see FIG. 9-5 (C)). When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, after the animation in which the ally character 71AK001 defeats the non-boss character 71AK005 (may be the same as or different from the "big hit" of "5R probability variation A" and "5R probability variation B"), The notification image 71AK006 is displayed as in the case of the one battle effect (FIG. 9-5 (C)). Then, similar to the first battle effect, the variable display of the current variable display and the variable display that has been suspended is “small hit”, and the corresponding icon C is not displayed (as described later. , C, which are specified by prefetching, etc.) are additionally displayed in the icon display area 71AK003 (see FIG. 9-5 (C)).

  When the variable display result is "5R probability variation C", "5R normal A", or "5R normal B" "big hit", the fixed decorative pattern corresponding to these big hit types is stopped and displayed by the end of the variable display ( See Fig. 9-5 (D). In Fig. 9-5 (D), the fixed decorative design of "5R normal A" is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, after the animation in which the ally character 71AK001 loses to the non-boss character 71AK005, the notification image 71AK007 is displayed as in the first battle effect (Fig. 9-5 (D)) (icons etc. Do not show).

  In the variable display of the decorative pattern in the high-probability / low-base state, the decorative pattern stops continuously on the left, right, and middle, and the reach etc. is not particularly emphasized.

  The first battle effect and the second battle effect may not be executed when the second special figure game is executed (such as when there is a restriction on the addition of the above icon). In this case, the first battle effect and the second battle effect are not executed, and a series of effects in which the teammate character 71AK001 follows the road 71AK002 is continued. In this case, suddenly the small hit game state and the big hit game state will come (however, if you pay attention to the decorative pattern reduced and displayed, you can recognize the arrival of the small hit game state or the big hit game state) .. Instead of the battle effect, an appropriate effect (including a reach effect) for notifying a "big hit" or a "small hit" may be executed.

  In the first battle effect and the second battle effect, the win / loss of the ally character 71AK001 separates the high probability / low base state continuation / end, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the first battle effect and the second battle effect have a high probability. / It is also a production that fuels the continuation / end of the low base state.

(During the small hit game state, production during the big hit game state, etc.)
The effect executed during the small hitting game state based on the “small hit” or “big hit” in the high probability / low base state, and during the big hit game state is due to a part of a series of effects in which the ally character 71AK001 moves on the road 71AK002. It should be configured. Although a specific presentation mode is arbitrary, for example, an image notifying that the small hitting game state is displayed is displayed so as to be superimposed on an image (image as shown in FIG. 9-3) in which the ally character 71AK001 follows the road 71AK002. (An image or the like for notifying the special winning opening may be displayed). For example, in the jackpot game state, when "5R probability variation A" or "5R probability variation B", an image informing that the high probability / low base state continues is an image in which the ally character 71AK001 advances along the road 71AK002 (Fig. 9- 3) (images shown in FIG. 3) may be superimposed and displayed (an image or the like notifying the start or end of the round game may be displayed). Also, in the case of "5R probability variation C", "5R normal A", or "5R normal B", the ally character 71AK001 advances the road 71AK002 with an image notifying that the high-probability / low-base state will end. It suffices to display the image (the image as shown in FIG. 9-3) in a superimposed manner (an image or the like notifying the start or end of the round game may be displayed).

(High probability / low base state (2nd KT state) continuous / non-continuous etc.)
Next, referring to FIG. 9-7 and FIG. 9-8, examples of continuation / non-continuation of high-probability / low-base state, opening timing of special winning opening, opening of special winning opening, display / erasure of icons, etc. Explain.

  In FIG. 9-7, the second special figure game (the first battle effect of winning) in which the variation pattern is PC1-1 and the variable display result is “small hit” is executed twice, and the variation pattern is PC1-2 and the variable display. The second special map game (winning second battle effect) with the result "small hit" is executed once, the variation pattern is PC1-2, and the variable display result is "5R probability variation A" or "5R probability variation B". It shows the opening of the special winning opening and the special winning opening, the high probability / low base state (the second KT state), etc., when the second special drawing game of "big hit" (the second battle effect of winning) is executed once.

  When the "small hit" is derived in the second special figure game, the icon C may be added at the time of deriving the "small hit" (at the end of the second special figure game and at the time of notifying the victory of the battle effect). As described above, the icon C is the second special figure game (which is being held) among the second special figure games (including pending and running) for which “small hit” is derived. (Including icon) is added (the icon C is not added when all have been displayed). After that, the small winning game is controlled and the special winning opening is opened (short opening). At the timing of opening the special winning opening, the icon C already displayed is erased. The mode of the small hitting game state is common regardless of the variation pattern of the second special figure game executed before that. In the small hitting gaming state, the gaming state does not change and remains in the high probability / low base state.

  After that, when the "big hit" of "5R probability variation A" or "5R probability variation B" is derived in the second special figure game, when "big hit" is derived (at the end of the second special figure game, victory of the battle effect) At the time of notification), icon A (in the case of “5R probability variation A”) or icon B (in the case of “5R probability variation B”) is added. The icon A or B is displayed for five rounds, that is, five icons are displayed. After that, the jackpot game state is controlled, and the special winning opening is opened for the number of rounds (long open for "5R probability variation A", middle release for "5R probability variation B"). At the timing of opening the special winning opening, the already displayed icon B or C is erased. The mode of the big hit game state is common regardless of the variation pattern of the second special figure game executed before that. In the jackpot gaming state, the gaming state returns to the normal state, but here, since the jackpot type is "5R certainty variation A" or "5R certainty variation B", after the big jackpot gaming state, control to the high probability / low base state again (High probability / low base state continues).

  9-8, similarly to FIG. 9-7, the second special figure game in which the variation pattern is PC1-1 and the variable display result is "small hit" is executed twice, and the variation pattern is PC1-2 and the variable display. The second special figure game with a result of "small hit" is executed once, and then the variation pattern is PC1-2 and the variable display result is "5R probability variation C", "5R normal A", or "5R normal B". It shows the opening of the special winning opening and the special winning opening, the high probability / low base state (the second KT state), etc., when the second special drawing game of “big hit” is executed once. In addition, during the first small hit game state, the second special figure game of the "big hit" is held. After the hold is issued, the addition of icons is restricted.

  The opening timing of the special winning opening and the special winning opening are the same as in the case of FIG. In the 2 special drawing game, the battle effect is not executed, and the icon C is not added. The icon C already displayed is erased by opening the special winning opening. Therefore, at the start of the "big hit" second special figure game, all the icons are erased. The second battle effect (losing battle effect) is executed corresponding to the second special drawing game of "big hit", but the icon A or B is not added in the second battle effect.

  In the big hit game state of "big hit", the game state returns to the normal state. After that, the gaming state is controlled to a state other than the high-probability / low-base state according to the jackpot type. Therefore, the high probability / low base state ends.

(Direction control command)
FIG. 9-9 shows a part of the effect control commands used in the characteristic part 71AK (note that the remaining commands may be those of the characteristic part or the basic description). The special winning opening opening designation command designates opening of the special winning opening. In the EXT data (“XX”) of the command, a value corresponding to the type of big hit is set (this makes it possible to specify whether the special winning opening is a long opening or a middle opening). The special winning opening opening designation command designates opening of the special winning opening. The pre-reading determination result command is a pre-reading determination (whether it is "big hit", "small hit", big hit type, etc.) in the second starting prize determination process executed when the second starting prize is generated. The determination result (pre-reading determination result) of the table and the random number value (which may be extracted at the time of the second starting prize) used in the pre-determination is designated. For the EXT data (“XX”) of the command, refer to the value (FIG. 9-9 (B)) according to the pre-reading determination result. “Small hit” is “00”, “5R probability variation A” is “big hit” If "01", "5R probability variation B""bighit","02", if "5R probability variation C""bighit","03","5R normal A""bighit" For example, "05") is set for "big hit" of "04" and "5R normal B".

(Command analysis process)
In the characteristic part 71AK, the processing shown in FIG. 9-10 is executed during the command analysis processing. In the process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the received effect control command is the prefetch determination result command, that is, whether the prefetch determination result command is received (step 71AKS001). When the command has been received (step 71AKS001; YES), the command is stored in the second start prize-winning command buffer (step 71AKS002).

  The second start prize winning command buffer is provided in the RAM 122. An example of the structure of the command buffer for the second start winning a prize is shown in FIG. 9-11. In the second start prize winning command buffer, holding numbers “00” to “04” on the production side are set, and one look-ahead determination result command is stored in association with each of these holding numbers. The hold number "00" corresponds to the variable display (second special figure game) currently being executed. The holding numbers “01” to “04” correspond to the currently held variable display (second special figure game). The pre-reading determination result command is stored in correspondence with the holding number of the smallest number among the holding numbers “01” to “04”, in which the command is not stored. In addition, the second start winning award command buffer is provided with a displayed flag in association with each of the holding numbers “00” to “04”. In the displayed flag, the variable display result (prefetch determination result) of the second special figure game corresponding to the prefetch determination result command is “small hit”, and the icon C (corresponding to the second special figure game) It is a flag which is turned on when an icon C) indicating the short opening of the special winning opening in the small hitting game state by the "small hit" in the second special drawing game is additionally displayed, and is otherwise turned off.

  After step 71AKS002, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the pre-reading determination result designated by the pre-reading determination result command stored in the second start prize-winning command buffer is "5R probability variation C" "big hit", "5R normal A" "big hit". , Or "5R normal B" or "big hit" is determined (step 71AKS003). In the case of any of the above (step 71AKS003; YES), an icon addition restriction flag (provided in the RAM 122, and turned on when the addition of the icon is restricted) for restricting the addition of the icon by the battle effect thereafter. The flag) is turned on (step 71AKS004). It should be noted that the icon addition restriction flag, when the variable display of the "big hit" of "5R probability change C", "5R normal A", or "5R normal B" is started, or when the big hit game state is started or ended after the "big hit". It is turned off at the time (the jackpot type is notified from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by an effect control command or the like at each timing described above). At the timing of turning off, the stored contents of the command buffer at the time of the second start winning a prize is checked, and the pre-reading determination result of the "big hit" of "5R probability variation C", "5R normal A", or "5R normal B" is designated. When the prefetch determination result command is stored, the icon addition restriction flag should not be turned off. As a result, even when a plurality of pre-reading determination result commands that specify the pre-reading determination result of the "big hit" of "5R probability variation C", "5R normal A", or "5R normal B" are stored, it is preferable. The icon addition restriction flag can be turned on. In particular, although rare, (1) a pre-reading determination result command that designates a pre-reading determination result of "big hit" of "5R probable variation C", "5R normal A", or "5R regular B" → (2) "5R probable variation A" Or "5R probability variation B" "big hit" lookahead determination result command → (3) "5R probability variation C", "5R normal A", or "5R normal B" "big hit" lookahead This is effective when each command is stored in the order of the prefetch judgment result command that specifies the judgment result.

  In the case of NO in step 71AKS003 or step 71AKS003 after step 71AKS004, the received effect control command is one of the commands transmitted when the execution of the second special figure game is started (for example, the start of the second special figure game is designated. Command or variation pattern command), that is, whether the command is received (step 71AKS005). When the command is received (step 71AKS005; YES), the stored contents of the second start prize-winning command buffer are shifted to the upper level (step 71AKS006). Specifically, the prefetch determination result command stored in the holding number “00” is deleted, and the displayed flag corresponding to the holding number “00” is reset (turned off). Then, the state of the prefetch determination result command and the displayed flag corresponding to each of the suspension numbers “01” to “04” is shifted to the next higher suspension number. As a result, the suspension number “00” becomes a number in which the prefetch determination result command corresponding to the second special figure game being executed is stored (“00” corresponds to the second special figure game being executed). .

  After step 71AKS006 or when determined to be NO in step 71AKS005, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the received effect control command is a special winning opening opening designation command, that is, whether the command is received. (Step 71AKS007). When it is received (step 71AKS007; YES), the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to erase the icon A or B currently displayed (step 71AKS008). Since the icons A and B are displayed at the start of the big hit game state (when the “big hit” is derived in the second special figure game), the effect control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to display the icon A or B. By instructing to erase, the icon A or B corresponding to the opening of the special winning opening (long open or middle open) in the big hit game state can be deleted. The display control unit 123 recognizes the icon A or B being displayed (for example, for the icons A to B, holds information indicating the type and number of the icon being displayed, and every time the icon is erased or additional display is performed. Then, the information is updated. The same applies to the icon C), and one of the icons A and B displayed on the image display device 5 is erased by the above instruction (note that neither the icon A nor the icon B is displayed). In that case, ignore the instruction). When the jackpot type designated by the special winning opening opening designation command is “5R probability variation A”, the effect control CPU 120 instructs deletion of the icon A, and when “5R probability variation B”, commands deletion of the icon B. May be good (in case of other jackpot types, icons are not displayed due to icon display limitation, so deletion instruction is not given). When the icon A and the icon B are erased, the display control unit 123 updates the digestion number indicated by the digestion number image 71AK004 (the number of digestion is incremented by 1 for each deletion of one icon. The same applies to the icon C). .

  After step 71AKS008 or when determined to be NO in step 71AKS007, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the received effect control command is a special winning opening opening designation command, that is, whether the command is received. (Step 71AKS009). When it is received (step 71AKS009; YES), the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to erase the icon C currently displayed (step 71AKS010). The display control unit 123 deletes one icon C being displayed on the image display device 5 according to the above instruction (note that when the icon C is not displayed, the instruction is ignored).

(Variable display start setting process)
The characteristic unit 71AK executes the processing shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13 as the variable display start setting processing. The variable display start waiting process executed before the variable display start setting process is executed as shown in FIG. 8-30. The KT states in the determination of step 138IWS812 of FIG. 8-30 are the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the high probability / high base state (first KT state), and the low probability / high base state (first KT state). Any one, that is, a state other than the normal state may be used. According to FIG. 8-30, when the game state at that time is the normal state which is the non-KT state, the variable display start setting process is executed when the first special figure game is executed. If the game state at that time is the KT state, the variable display start setting process is executed when the second special figure game is executed. The game state is notified from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by a production control command when the game state is changed, such as when the jackpot gaming state ends. The effect control CPU 120 stores the notified information about the game state in the RAM 122 or the like as the information about the current game state. The effect control CPU 120 recognizes the current game state by referring to the information. The gaming state may be recognized by a background designation command of the characteristic part 183IW.

  When the variable display start setting process is started, the effect control board 12 sends an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) for designating a change pattern and a variable display result transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the special drawing game. Has received a command (display result specifying command) (these commands are processed in the command analysis process), the effect control CPU 120 uses these commands to change the variable display variable pattern (hereinafter referred to as the variable pattern). , And the variable display result of this time) and the variable display result (hereinafter, also referred to as the variable display result of this time) can be recognized. Further, the variation pattern may also specify whether the first special figure game is executed or the second special figure game is executed, like the characteristic portion 183IW. A command capable of specifying whether the first special figure game is executed or the second special figure game is executed may be prepared.

  In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the special figure game executed this time is the second special figure game (step 71AKS101). When it is the second special figure game (step 71AKS101; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the current game state is the second KT state, that is, the high probability / low base state (step 71AKS102). If it is in the second KT state (step 71AKS102; YES), it is determined whether the icon addition restriction flag is on (step 71AKS103), and if it is off (step 71AKS103; NO), the variable display result this time is "5R. It is determined whether it is a "big hit" of "probability variation A" or "5R probability variation B" (step 71AKS104). If the icon addition restriction flag is off, there is no hold of the second special drawing game of "big hit" of "5R probability variation C", "5R normal A" or "5R normal B", and this time. The variable display result of is one of "small hit", "big hit" of "5R certainty variation A", and "big hit" of "5R certainty variation B".

  When the variable display result this time is a "big hit" of "5R probability variation A" or "5R probability variation B" (step 71AKS104; YES), the first determination regarding the battle effect is performed (step 71AKS105). An example of the first decision is shown in Figure 9-14. As shown in FIG. 9-14, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the battle effect at different determination rates according to the big hit type of the current variable display result and the current variation pattern. For example, when the jackpot type is "5R probability variation A" and the variation pattern is PC1-2, the teammate character 71AK001 wins, and it is determined that the second battle effect in which five icons A are added is always executed. For example, when the jackpot type is "5R probability variation B" and the variation pattern is PC1-1, the teammate character 71AK001 wins, and it is determined to execute the first battle effect of adding 5 icons B at a ratio of 40/100. To do. Further, in this case, it is determined that the first battle effect is not executed at a ratio of 60/100.

  When the variable display result this time is not the "big hit" of "5R probability change A" or "5R probability change B", that is, when it is "small hit" (step 71AKS104; NO), the effect control CPU 120 causes the step of FIG. 9-13. 71AKS201, the pre-reading judgment result command (pre-reading judgment result command in which the icon C is not displayed is "Small hit" in which the pre-reading judgment result is "Small hit" and the corresponding displayed flag is OFF in the second start winning command buffer It is determined whether or not the prefetch determination result command corresponding to the variable display is stored (step 71AKS201).

  When the prefetch determination result command is stored (step 71AKS201; YES), the second decision regarding the battle effect is made (step 71AKS202). An example of the second decision is shown in Figure 9-15. As shown in FIG. 9-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the battle effect at a different determination rate depending on the current variation pattern. For example, when the variation pattern is PC1-1, it is determined that the ally character 71AK001 wins and the first battle effect of adding the icon C is executed at a ratio of 90/100. Further, in this case, it is determined that the first battle effect is not executed at a ratio of 10/100. When the variation pattern is PC1-2, it is determined that the ally character 71AK001 wins and the second battle effect in which the icon C is added is executed at a ratio of 10/100. Further, in this case, it is determined that the second battle effect is not executed at a ratio of 90/100. Here, as described above, it is determined that the same number of icons C as the number of prefetch determination result commands for which the prefetch determination result is “small hit” and the corresponding displayed flag is off.

  After step 71AKS202, all the displayed flags corresponding to the prefetch determination result command (command in which the prefetch determination result is "small hit" and the corresponding displayed flag is off) are turned on (step 71AKS203). If the prefetch determination result command is not stored (step 71AKS201; NO), there is no icon to be added, so it is determined not to execute the battle effect (step 71AKS204). After step 71AKS203 and step 71AKS204, step 71AKS111 of FIG. 9-12 is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 9-12, when the icon addition restriction flag is on (step 71AKS103; YES), the variable display result this time is “5R probability variation C”, “5R normal A” or “5R normal B” “big hit”. Is determined (step 71AKS106), and in any of these cases (step 71AKS106; YES), a battle effect in which the icon is not added and the ally character 71AK001 loses (this variation pattern is PC1-1 It is determined that the first battle effect is to be executed in the case of, and the second battle effect is to be executed if the current variation pattern is PC1-2 (step 71AKS107). Note that no icon is added when executing the losing battle production. If the variable display result this time is not one of the variable display results (step 71AKS106; NO), it is determined not to execute the battle effect (step 71AKS108). By these processes, when the variable display of the "big hit" of "5R probability change C", "5R normal A" or "5R normal B" is occurring (when the icon addition restriction flag is on), Execution of the battle effect other than the battle effect in the variable display, that is, the battle effect before the variable display is restricted (prohibited here), and addition of the icon is restricted.

  When it is not the second special figure game that is executed this time (step 71AKS101; NO), it means that the first special figure game is executed this time. Therefore, execution of the effect during execution of the first special figure game is executed. The type of effect and the like are determined (step 71AKS109). Specifically, depending on the variable display result this time and the variation pattern (things that specify the reach etc. are prepared), the reach effect (for example, a "big hit" fixed decorative pattern such as "5R probability variation A" is derived. Whether or not a notice effect is performed, whether or not a notice effect is executed, and the type of effect to be executed are determined. The specific contents of the effect when the first special figure game is executed are arbitrary.

  When the present is not the second KT state, the current gaming state is the first KT state (as described above, the variable display start setting process is executed when the second special figure game is executed, Since the game state at that time is the KT state), the presence / absence of execution of the effect in the first KT state, the type of effect to be executed, etc. are determined (step 71AKS110). Specifically, depending on the variable display result this time and the variation pattern (things that specify the reach etc. are prepared), the reach effect (for example, a "big hit" fixed decorative pattern such as "5R probability variation A" is derived. Whether or not a notice effect is performed, whether or not a notice effect is executed, and the type of effect to be executed are determined. The specific content of the effect in the first KT state is arbitrary.

  After step 71AKS105, step 71AKS107, and step 71AKS108, the fixed decorative design is determined (71AKS111). The fixed decorative pattern may be one that corresponds to the present variable display result, the present variation pattern (in the case of “miss”, it is possible to confirm whether or not the reach is lost). The fixed decorative design of the loss may be determined by lottery or the like.

  After that, the display control unit 123 is instructed to execute the effect according to the determination result (71AKS112). For example, the display control unit 123 is instructed to variably display the decorative design in the mode designated by the variation pattern this time and to derive the fixed decorative design determined above. Upon receiving the instruction, the display control unit 123 starts variable display of the decorative pattern. Further, when it is determined to execute the battle effect, the display control unit 123 executes the battle effect (the winning or losing first battle or the second battle effect) and adds any one of the icons A to C. Instruct. Upon receiving the instruction, the display control unit 123 executes the designated type of battle effect, and adds any of the icons A to C after the battle effect (executes the effect of FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5). To). When it is determined to execute the reach effect, the display control unit 123 is instructed to execute the reach effect from the time when the reach is established. Upon receiving the instruction, the display control unit 123 starts executing the reach effect when the reach is established. After that, the production process flag is updated to "2" (71AKS113).

(Action effect, etc.)
As shown in FIGS. 9-14 and 9-15, in the variation pattern PC1-1, when the variable display result is “big hit” of “5R probability variation A”, and when the variable display result is “5R probability variation B” of “big hit”. ", And the variable display result is" small hit ", the execution ratio of the winning first battle effect is 2: 4: 9 (" small hit "is the most effective first battle effect. Easy to get). On the other hand, in the variation pattern PC1-2, when the variable display result is “5R probability variation A” “big hit”, when the variable display result is “5R probability variation B” “big hit”, the variable display result is “small hit”. In the case of “win”, the execution ratio of the winning second battle effect is 10: 9.5: 1 (“5R probability variation A” is most likely to execute the second battle effect). Here, the variation patterns PC1-1 and PC1-2 are equal to each other in the determination rate of 1/2, so that the variation pattern does not affect the magnitude relationship between the execution rates of the first battle effect and the second battle effect. .. Here, when the variable display result is "5R probability change A""bighit", the icon A is added by the winning first battle effect or the second battle effect, and the variable display result is "5R probability change B""bighit". , The icon B is added by the winning first battle effect or the second battle effect, and when the variable display result is “small hit”, the icon C is selected by the winning first battle effect or the second battle effect. To be added. As described above, in the characteristic portion 71AK, the proportion of which of the icons A to C indicating the opening of the special winning opening or the special winning opening is additionally displayed is different depending on the type of the battle effect to be executed. As a result, the relationship between the battle effect and the icon is not constant, so that these effects are not monotonous and the interest of the game is improved.

  Moreover, since the second battle effect has a longer execution period than the first battle effect, a plurality of types of battle effects having different execution periods are prepared, and there are many variations of the effect, which improves the enjoyment of the game. There is.

  Icon A indicates long opening of the special winning opening, icon B indicates middle opening of the special winning opening, and icon C indicates short opening of the special winning opening. The open state of the special winning opening or the special winning opening is advantageous because the longer the opening upper limit period is, the more game balls can be won. For this reason, the open mode indicated by these icons in the order of icon A> icon B> icon C is advantageous. Here, the icon A having a high advantage is more likely to be displayed when the second battle effect is executed than when the first battle effect is executed (FIGS. 9-14, etc.). Since the icon A is long open, the player expects the display to some extent. The player who expects to display the icon A pays attention to whether the first battle effect or the second battle effect is executed as the battle effect, and the interest of the game is improved. In particular, since the icon A having a high advantage is easily displayed by the second battle effect having a long execution period, the interest of the game is improved.

  It is possible to additionally display one or more icons C by one battle effect, and the display of the icons C is information on the variable display that has not yet been started. Since it is performed based on the random number value for determining or the pre-reading determination result command (in particular, based on the pre-reading determination result), the interest of the game is improved. In particular, by pre-reading, it is possible to add a plurality of icons C corresponding to one battle production, which allows a large number of icons C to be displayed and suggests that the special winning opening is opened multiple times. The interest in is improving.

  The icons A to C are displayed based on the battle effect, so that the player pays attention to whether or not the battle effect is executed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  If a hold to terminate the high-probability / low-base state (holding a "big hit" with a look-ahead determination result of "5R probability change C", "5R normal A", or "5R normal B") occurs, the icon Display is restricted (prohibited). Then, during the special jackpot game of "big hit" of "5R probability change C", "5R normal A", or "5R normal B", the battle effect is executed in a state where no icon is displayed on the screen. Therefore, depending on the presence or absence of the icon when the battle effect is executed, the win / loss of the battle effect (whether the high probability / low base state continues) can be predicted, and the interest of the game is improved.

(Modification of the characteristic part 71AK)
Modification examples of the characteristic portion 71AK will be listed below. At least some of the plurality of modified examples may be combined.

(Modification 1)
In the above, the battle effect is executed while the icons are displayed, but the number of icons already displayed (the total number of icons A to C may be used, or any of the icons A to C may be displayed). Depending on the number (for example, the number of icons C), the execution ratio of the battle effect (the execution ratio of the entire battle effect may be good, or the execution ratio of a specific battle effect such as the second battle effect). May be present) may be different. As a result, the execution ratio of the battle effect differs depending on the number of icons, so that the effect is not monotonous and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, the number of icons also attracts attention, which improves the fun of the game.

  In order to realize the above-described configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-16, when the “big hit” of “5R probability variation A” and the variation pattern is PC1-2, the displayed icon ( Here, when the number of the icons A to C is two or less, it is higher than that when the number of the displayed icons (here, the total of the icons A to C) is three or more. It is good to decide to execute 2 battle production. Note that the number of icons may be counted by, for example, an arbitrary counter provided in the RAM 122 (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the battle effect, the number of icons to be added by the battle effect is determined. Addition to the count value of the counter).

  As shown in FIG. 9-16, the smaller the number of displayed icons is, the higher the ratio of the second battle effect executed is, so that the effect is not monotonous and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. it can. In addition, the number of icons will also attract attention, improving the fun of the game.

(Modification 2)
In the high probability / low base state, a meter image 71AK021 as shown in FIG. 9-17 (A) may be displayed. The meter image 71AK021 is updated and displayed when a predetermined number of icons are displayed, and the meter is moved up one scale. The update display may be performed each time the total number of the displayed icons A to C reaches a predetermined number, or as shown in FIG. 9-17 (B), the update display is required for each of the icons A to C. The number of display may be set (icon A is “10”, icon B is “5”, icon C is “2”). When the meter of the meter image 71AK021 is full, for example, a special music is released as a music output in a high-probability / low-bass state (for example, the player uses the stick controller 31A to You will be able to specify the playback). The number of displayed icons is counted by a counter provided in the RAM 122 as in the first modification (when the number of displayed icons A to C is counted, a counter is provided for each icon). As described above, by displaying the icon, you can play different benefits (particularly, special effects (including music) that can be executed) that are different from the benefits linked to prize balls (opening of special winning openings and special winning openings). The interest of the game is improved by giving it to the player. In addition, by varying the number of icons displayed for updating display of the meter image 71AK021 for each of the icons A to C, variations in updating display (variations in timing of updating display) are increasing, and the entertainment of the game is increased. Has improved. Further, the icons A to C are arranged in ascending order of the degree of advantage (the order in which the open upper limit period is short), and the number required to update and display the meter image 71AK021 is small (the icon A is “10”, the icon B is Even if "5", the icon C is "2"), and the icon C is displayed, the privilege can be expected to be provided, and the interest of the game is improved.

(Modification 3)
Regarding the gaming state and the like, that of the characteristic part 183IW may be adopted. In this case, the high-probability / low-base state of the characteristic part 71AK is applied to the high-probability / low-base state of the characteristic part 183IW, and in the high-probability / low-base state of the characteristic part 183IW, the series of effects and battle effects, Display icons, etc. As the variation pattern in the high-probability / low-base state, it is preferable that the above-mentioned PC1-1 and PC1-2 are used to enable execution of the first battle effect and the second battle effect. In the case of 16R probability jackpot and 2R probability jackpot, the battle production wins and the high probability / low base state continues, and in the case of 9R probability variation jackpot and 2R normal jackpot, the battle production is lost and high probability / low base state Should end. The variation patterns and effects used in other gaming states may be those of the characteristic portion 183IW.

(Modification 4)
A plurality of small hitting game states in which the special winning opening is opened may be provided. In this case, for example, a plurality of small hit types are prepared.

(Modification 5)
The icons A to C do not indicate the one-time opening of the special winning opening and the special winning opening, but may indicate a plurality of opening.

(Modification 6)
There are two types of battle effects in the above, but three or more types may be prepared. Two or four or more icons may be provided according to the opening mode of the special winning opening or the special winning opening.

(Modification 7)
In the above, although the hold is not checked for the icon A or B, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 determines in step 71AKS105 to execute the winning battle effect displaying the icon A, the second start winning prize. When the stored contents of the hour command buffer are checked, it is determined whether or not the prefetch determination result command designating the "big hit" of the "5R probability variation A" is stored in at least one of the holding numbers "01" to "04", In the case where it is stored, it may be determined to further display the icon A for the number of commands × 5 (the icon A is displayed at the end of the battle effect). The effect control CPU 120 may perform the same process for the icon B as well. In this way, the icons A and B may also be displayed based on the hold (prefetch determination result command). If the number of displayed icons is large, the icons may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

(Modification 8)
In the step 71AKS202, the display of the icon C may be restricted thereafter for the “small hit” look-ahead determination result command stored in the second start prize-winning command buffer when the battle effect is not executed. Due to such a limitation, when no icons are displayed at the start of variable display, the chance of executing the winning battle production increases, and the battle production executed when no icon is displayed is not always lost. The interest of the game is improved. If there is no such restriction, the chance of losing the battle effect that is executed when no icon is displayed is extremely high, while the chances of displaying the icon C are increased, which also enhances the entertainment of the game. To do.

(Modification 9)
Even in the case of "5R Probability Change A" or "5R Probability Change B", it is possible to execute the losing battle effect, and in the subsequent effect during the big hit game state, the high probability / low base state (second KT state) is continued. You may make it perform a revival production.

(Modification 10)
The battle effect may be a series of battle effects from the variable display to the big hit game state or the small hit game state (the icon may be additionally displayed during the battle (for example, when an attack hits)).

(Modification 11)
A draw may be provided for the battle production. For example, in the case of a small hit, the battle effect may be drawn and the icon C may be additionally displayed.

(Structure disclosed by the characteristic unit 71AK)
The gaming machines will be enumerated below, which exemplify at least part of the configuration described above.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a characteristic part 71AK) for playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball),
A first state in which the game medium is easy to win (for example, a large winning opening or a special winning opening is open) and a second state in which the game medium is unwinnable or difficult to win (for example, a large winning opening or a special winning opening is closed) ) Variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7 and special variable winning ball device 17),
Advantageous state control means (for example, main board 11) that the variable winning means controls to the advantageous state (for example, big hit game state) that can be changed to the first state (for example, long open or middle open) for a predetermined period,
A special state (for example, a small hit game state) in which the variable winning means can change to the first state (for example, a short open state) for a period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, a period when the upper limit open period is shorter than the big hit game state). ) Special state control means (for example, the main board 11),
Special state control means (for example, main board 11) for controlling to a special state (for example, high probability / low base state (for example, second KT state, small hit RUSH)) whose frequency of control to the special state is higher than the normal state )When,
A plurality of types of suggestive effects that suggest that the variable winning means changes to the first state when controlled to the special state (for example, display of icon A, display of icon B, display of icon C) And a suggested effect execution means (for example, effect control board 12) capable of executing
A plurality of types including a first specific effect (for example, a first battle effect) and a second specific effect (for example, a second battle effect) different from the first specific effect when being controlled to the special state Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control board 12) capable of executing the specific effect (for example, battle effect),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect when the specific effect is executed,
The ratio of which of the plurality of types of suggestive effects is executed is different between when the first specific effect is executed and when the second specific effect is executed (for example, FIG. 9-14, (Determination rate in Figure 9-15),
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The variable winning means is composed of two devices, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17, in the above-mentioned configuration. In this case, the variable winning means is in the first state by opening one of them. The special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 may be combined into one device as a variable winning means, and the special winning opening and the special winning opening may be combined into one large winning opening or a special winning opening. The second state may be a state in which the game medium cannot win or is difficult to win, particularly a state in which the game medium is harder to win than the first state. The second state may be a closed state (an example of a state in which the game medium cannot win) or a partially open state (an example of a state in which the game medium is difficult to win).

  The change in the first state of the variable winning means in the advantageous state or the special state may be performed once or a plurality of times. For example, the big winning opening in the big hit game state may be opened once instead of a plurality of times as described above (the number of rounds, which may be other than 5R). For example, the special winning opening in the small hitting game state may be opened plural times instead of once as described above. In the above, the opening of the special winning opening and the opening of the special winning opening enter the opening timing of the opening upper limit period (the timing when the elapsed time from the start of opening reaches the opening upper limit period) and the special winning opening or the special winning opening. The timing until the number of played game balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9), or the earlier, whichever comes first, the predetermined period and the predetermined number are each of the special winning opening in the jackpot gaming state. It may be open and different. Further, the predetermined period and the predetermined number may be different for each opening of the special winning opening in the small hitting game state. The predetermined number may be the same or different between the big hit game state and the small hit game state. One suggestion effect may suggest a change of the variable winning means of the variable winning means to the first state once or a plurality of times of changing to the first state (for example, as described above). In addition, each of the icons A to C may indicate a single opening of the special winning opening or the special winning opening, or a plurality of opening of the special winning opening or the special winning opening (for example, one big hit). All of the special winning opening and special winning opening in the gaming state and the small hitting gaming state (in this case, the icon may also indicate one big hitting gaming state and one small winning gaming state).

  "A period shorter than a predetermined period" includes, for example, a case where the above-mentioned upper limit period is short and the above-mentioned predetermined number is small (when the game balls are smoothly won, the smaller the above-mentioned predetermined number is, the faster the game is released. Is over). It can be said that the “period shorter than the predetermined period” is a period having a low advantage for the player. In addition, the variable winning means may be changed to the first state a plurality of times in the advantageous state and the special state. In this case, the comparison of the periods in the “period shorter than the predetermined period” is performed during each period in which the state changes to the first state. The comparison may be performed with each other, or the total may be compared with each other during each period in which the state changes to the first state. For example, the opening upper limit period (and / or the predetermined number) of each opening (each round) of the special winning opening in the big hitting game state, and the opening upper limit period of each opening of the special winning opening in the small hitting game state (and / or Either longer (more) than any of the predetermined number), or the total of the opening upper limit period of each opening (each round) of the special winning opening in the big hit game state (and / or the total of the predetermined number) is a small hit. It may be set longer (more) than the total (and / or the total of the predetermined number) of the opening upper limit periods of each opening of the special winning opening in the gaming state. The variable winning means may be changed to the first state a plurality of times in one of the advantageous state and the special state, and the variable winning means may be changed once in the other state. May be a comparison between each of a plurality of times and one time, or a total of a plurality of times and a comparison of once. For example, when the special winning opening is opened once in the small-hit gaming state when the special winning opening is opened a plurality of times in the big-hit gaming state (a plurality of rounds are executed), the opening upper limit period of each opening of the big winning opening (and / or (Or the total of the predetermined number), or the total of the upper limit periods of the respective opening of the special winning opening (and / or the total of the predetermined number) than the opening upper limit period of the opening of the special winning opening (and / or the predetermined number). It should be long (more) (the above-mentioned characteristic part satisfies both the former and the latter). For example, when the special winning opening is opened once in the big hitting game state and the special winning opening is opened multiple times in the small hitting game state, the opening upper limit period (and / or the predetermined number) of opening the big winning mouth is set to the special winning prize. If it is longer (more) than any of the opening upper limit period (and / or the predetermined number) of each opening of the mouth or the total opening upper limit period (or of the above-mentioned predetermined number) of each opening of the special winning opening Good.

  Although icon display is illustrated as an example of the suggestive effect, the suggestive effect may be an effect in another form. For example, it may be a character display or animation effect. Further, the suggestive effect may be executed, or the variable winning means may have a pattern of gase that does not change to the first state (in the above, the big winning opening or the special winning opening is always open depending on the display of the icon. ).

  As the specific effect, the battle effect is exemplified above, but various effects such as a cut-in notice and a dialogue notice may be adopted as the specific effect.

  The suggestive effect may be executed if triggered by the specific effect. Regarding the suggestive effect, “executable when the specific effect is executed” means that the suggestive effect is executed along with the end of the specific effect, and before the specific effect ends when the specific effect starts. It also includes the execution of suggestive performance.

  The method of differentiating the ratio of which of the plurality of types of suggestive effects is executed between when the first specific effect is executed and when the second specific effect is executed is not limited to the above method. For example, the display or type of the icon is determined based on the pre-reading determination result designated by the pre-reading determination result command stored in the second start prize command buffer (which icon should be displayed depending on the type of big hit or "small hit"). It is to be noted that the determination of the display of the icon once determines the display of one of the icons A to C), and the determination of the type of the battle effect depending on which icon is determined to be displayed. Different proportions. In this case, a common variation pattern of variation time (for example, 15 seconds) capable of executing the first battle effect and the second battle effect is prepared, and the first battle effect is part of the variation time (for example, The second battle effect may be performed using the variable time. Further, for each of the variation patterns PC1-1 and PC1-2, a battle effect of fighting a boss character and a battle effect of fighting a non-boss character may be prepared.

  According to the above configuration, since the ratio of which of the plurality of types of suggestive effects is executed is different between when the first specific effect is executed and when the second specific effect is executed, the effect is monotonous. Therefore, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The production period of the second specific production is longer than that of the first specific production (for example, the production execution period of the second battle production is longer),
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, there are many variations of the production, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The plurality of types of suggestive effects include a first suggestive effect (for example, the display of the icon C) and the variable winning means in the first state in a mode having a higher advantage than when the first suggestive effect is executed. A second suggestion effect that changes to (for example, display of icon A),
The second suggestive effect is executed at a higher rate when the second specific effect is executed than when the first specific effect is executed (for example, the second battle effect is executed). At this time, the icon A is more easily displayed than when the first battle effect is executed),
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, when expecting the execution of the second suggestive effect, the player pays attention to whether the first specific effect is executed or the second specific effect is executed to improve the interest of the game. You can Moreover, when the second specific effect has a longer effect period than the first specific effect, the second suggestion effect is more likely to be executed via the second specific effect having a longer effect period, and the interest of the game is improved.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
Variable display (for example, variable display of the second special figure game or decorative design) can be executed,
Pending storage means (for example, a second pending storage buffer, a second pending storage buffer, a second preliminary storage buffer, for storing information about variable display that has not been started yet as pending information (for example, a random number value for determining a display result or a variation pattern, a prefetch determination result command) Command buffer at the time of winning a prize)
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect (for example, display of the icon C) based on the hold information.
The suggestive effect is an effect capable of displaying one or more suggestive displays (for example, displaying one or more icons C),
You may do it.

    According to the above configuration, since a plurality of suggestion displays can be displayed, the interest of the game can be improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above,
The suggestion display is displayed based on the specific effect (for example, the icon is additionally displayed by the win of the teammate character 71AK001 in the battle effect).
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, since the suggestion display is displayed based on the specific effect, it is possible for the player to pay attention to the presence or absence of the execution of the specific effect and improve the interest of the game. “The suggestion display is displayed based on the specific effect” may be that the suggestion display is displayed when the execution of the specific effect is triggered, and the suggestion display may be displayed during the execution of the specific effect.

(6) In the gaming machine of (4) or (5) above,
The specific effect execution unit can execute the specific effect when the suggestion display is displayed (for example, see FIG. 9-3),
The rate at which the specific effect is executed varies depending on the number of the suggested displays being displayed (see, for example, FIG. 9-16),
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, the ratio of the specific effect to be executed varies depending on the number of displayed suggestion displays, so that the effect is not monotonous and the interest of the game can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (4) to (6) above,
The specific effect execution unit can execute the specific effect when the suggestion display is displayed (for example, see FIG. 9-3),
The smaller the number of displayed suggestion displays, the higher the ratio of execution of the second specific effect (see, for example, FIG. 9-16),
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, the smaller the number of displayed suggestion displays is, the higher the rate of execution of the second specific effect is, so that the effect is not monotonous and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (4) to (7) above,
Specific display means (for example, effect) that can display a specific display (for example, meter image 71AK021) and update display of the specific display (for example, increase of meter image 71AK021) according to the number of times of execution of the suggestive effect. Control board 12),
The privilege display means (for example, the production control board 12) which gives a predetermined privilege (for example, opening of a premier song) when the specific display is in a specific mode (for example, the meter image 71AK021 is full) by the update display. And
The specific display means,
When the suggestive effect is executed a predetermined number of times, it is possible to perform update display of the specific display (for example, the meter of the meter image 71AK021 rises every time 10 icons A are displayed),
When the suggestion effect in which the variable winning means changes to the first state in a mode in which the degree of advantage is lower than a predetermined reference is executed, it is possible to update the specific display with a specific number smaller than a predetermined number. (For example, the meter rises every time five icons B are displayed, and the meter of the meter image 71AK021 rises every time two icons C are displayed).
You may do it.

  When the suggestive effect displays a suggestive display such as an icon, the display of one suggestive display may be one suggestive effect (for each display of the one suggestive display, the suggestive effect is considered to have been executed once). Good). The specific display is a counter that displays a numerical value (the update of the numerical value is the “update display”. The display of “0” is the “specific mode”.) ”And the stopwatch (the elapsed time is the“ update display ”. The remaining time“ "0" may be the "specific mode"), a bomb with a squib ignited (the fact that the squib is shortened is the "update", and the explosion of the bomb is the "specific mode").

  According to the above configuration, there are many variations regarding the update display, and the interest of the game can be improved.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General prize hole 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 17 ... Special variable winning ball device 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate Switch 22A, 22B ... Starting opening switch 23 ... 1st count switch 24 ... 2nd count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 41 ... Passage gate 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine for playing a game using a game medium,
Variable winning means capable of changing the game medium into a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which the game medium is unwinnable or difficult to win a prize,
Advantageous state control means for controlling the variable winning means into an advantageous state in which the variable winning means can change to the first state for a predetermined period,
Special state control means for controlling the variable winning means to a special state in which the variable state can be changed to the first state for a period shorter than the predetermined period
Special state control means for controlling to a special state in which the frequency controlled to the special state is higher than the normal state,
Suggestion production execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion productions suggesting that the variable winning means changes to the first state when being controlled to the special state,
A specific effect executing unit capable of executing a plurality of types of specific effects including a first specific effect and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect when controlled to the special state,
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect when the specific effect is executed,
The ratio of which of the plurality of types of suggestive effects is executed is different between when the first specific effect is executed and when the second specific effect is executed,
Amusement machine.

Images